Yealink SIP-T2 SERIES Administrator's Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Yealink Manuals
  4. IP Phone
  5. SIP-T2 Series
  6. Administrator's manual

Yealink SIP-T2 SERIES Administrator's Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for SIP-T2 SERIES:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Table Of Contents
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual See also: Administrator's Manual
63

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the SIP-T2 SERIES and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Yealink SIP-T2 SERIES

Summary of Contents for Yealink SIP-T2 SERIES

  • Page 2: Declaration Of Conformity

    Copyright Copyright © 2017 YEALINK(XIAMEN) NETWORK TECHNOLOGY Copyright © 2017 Yealink(Xiamen) Network Technology CO., LTD. All rights reserved. No parts of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Yealink(Xiamen) Network Technology CO., LTD.

  • Page 3: Class B Digital Device Or Peripheral

    Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately. Customer Feedback We are striving to improve our documentation quality and we appreciate your feedback. Email your opinions and comments to DocsFeedback@yealink.com.

  • Page 4: Gnu Gpl Information

    GPL. Please refer to the GPL for the exact terms and conditions of the license. The original GPL license, source code of components licensed under GPL and used in Yealink products can be downloaded from Yealink web site: http://www.yealink.com/GPLOpenSource.aspx?BaseInfoCateId=293&NewsCateId=293&CateId=293.

  • Page 5: Introduction

    Introduction About This Guide Yealink administrator guide is intended for administrators who need to properly configure, customize, manage, and troubleshoot the IP phone system rather than end-users. This guide will help you understand the Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) components, and provides descriptions of all available phone features.
  • Page 6 The purpose of is to serve as a basic guidance for provisioning Yealink IP phones with a provisioning server. If you are new to this process, it is helpful to read this guide. Description of Configuration Parameters in CFG Files, which describes all configuration ...

  • Page 7: Conventions Used In Yealink Documentations

    Introduction Conventions Used in Yealink Documentations Yealink documentations contain a few typographic conventions and writing conventions. You need to know the following basic typographic conventions to distinguish types of in-text information: Convention Description Highlights the web/phone user interface items such as menus, menu selections, soft keys, or directory names when they are involved in a procedure or user action (e.g., Click on...
  • Page 8 The central provisioning method requires you to configure parameters located in CFG format configuration files that Yealink provides. For more information on configuration files, refer to Configuration Files on page 127.
  • Page 9 Introduction The following configuration parameter table describes the parameter that you can configure to make the feature (e.g., auto answer) work. Sometimes you will see the words “Refer to the following content” in the Permitted Values or Note Default field. It means the permitted value or the default value of the parameter has the model difference or there are many permitted values of the parameter, you can get more details from the following Description field.
  • Page 10 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones For example, if you want to enable the auto answer feature for account 1, you need to locate the account.1.auto_answer in the MAC.cfg file and then configure it as required (e.g., account.1.auto_answer = 1).

  • Page 11: Recommended References

    For more information on configuring and administering other Yealink products not included in this guide, refer to product support page at Yealink Technical Support. To access the latest Release Notes or other guides for Yealink IP phones, refer to the Document Download page for your phone at Yealink Technical Support.

  • Page 12: Understanding Voip Principle And Sip Components

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones If you want to find Request for Comments (RFC) documents, type http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfcNNNN.txt (NNNN is the RFC number) into the location field of your browser. This guide mainly takes the SIP-T46G IP phones as example for reference. For more details on...
  • Page 13 Introduction SIP provides capabilities to: Determine the location of the target endpoint -- SIP supports address resolution, name  mapping, and call redirection. Determine media capabilities of the target endpoint -- Via Session Description Protocol  (SDP), SIP determines the “lowest level” of common services between endpoints. Conferences are established using only media capabilities that can be supported by all endpoints.

  • Page 14: Summary Of Changes

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones firewalls like to know what applications are flowing through which ports and it is possible to use content types of other applications other than the one you are trying to let through what has been denied.
  • Page 15 Introduction Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) on page  Visual Alert and Audio Alert for BLF Pickup on page  Busy Lamp Field (BLF) List on page  Receiving RTP Stream on page  Action URI on page  Ring Tones on page ...
  • Page 16 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Dial Plan using Digit Map String Rules on page  Call Number Filter on page  Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) on page  Intercom on page  Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) on page ...

  • Page 17: Table Of Contents

    Expansion Modules ................................13 Getting Started ................17 What IP Phones Need to Meet ............................17 Yealink IP Phones in a Network ............................17 Connecting the IP Phones ..............................18 Attaching the Stand and the Optional Wall Mount Bracket................ 19 Connecting the Handset and Optional Headset ....................
  • Page 18 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Setting Up Your System .............. 35 Setting Up Your Phone Network ............................35 DHCP ....................................36 DHCP Option ................................... 40 Configuring Network Parameters Manually ....................... 45 Configuring Transmission Methods of the Internet Port and PC Port ............ 50 Configuring PC Port Mode ............................

  • Page 19: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents Time and Date ..................................225 NTP Time Server ................................227 Time and Date Settings ............................. 232 Daylight Saving Time (DST) ............................. 237 Language ....................................244 Loading Language Packs ............................245 Specifying the Language to Use..........................252 Input Method ..................................254 Keypad Input Method Customization .........................
  • Page 20 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Anonymous Call ..................................373 Anonymous Call Rejection ..............................377 Do Not Disturb (DND) ................................. 381 Busy Tone Delay ..................................397 Return Code When Refuse ..............................399 Early Media ....................................400 180 Ring Workaround ................................. 401 Use Outbound Proxy in Dialog ............................
  • Page 21 Table of Contents Reboot in Talking .................................. 537 Answer By Hand ..................................538 USB Recording ..................................539 Call Recording ................................539 CSTA Control ................................... 541 Quick Login ....................................542 Configuring Advanced Features ..........545 Remote Phone Book ................................546 Customizing Remote Phone Book Template File ................... 546 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) ......................
  • Page 22 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configuring EDK Feature ............................748 Configuring EDK List..............................750 Configuring EDK Prompt ............................752 Configuring EDK Soft Keys ............................754 Configuring a Custom Key ............................762 Example Macros ................................769 Configuring Audio Features ............771 Redial Tone ....................................
  • Page 23 Table of Contents Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol (SRTP) ......................885 Encrypting and Decrypting Files ............................. 888 Configuration Parameters ............................888 Encrypting and Decrypting Configuration Files ....................893 Encrypting and Decrypting Contact Files ......................896 Incoming Signaling Validation ............................896 Troubleshooting ................. 899 Troubleshooting Methods ..............................
  • Page 24 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones RFC and Internet Draft Support ..........................984 SIP Request..................................987 SIP Header ..................................988 SIP Responses ................................989 SIP Session Description Protocol (SDP) Usage ....................992 Appendix I: SIP Call Flows ..............................992 Successful Call Setup and Disconnect ........................

  • Page 25: Product Overview

    3261), and they can only be used within a network that supports this model of phone. For a list of key features available on Yealink IP phones running the latest firmware, refer to Features of IP Phones on page 12.
  • Page 26 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones SIP-T48G/S Physical Features: 7” 800 x 480 pixel color touch screen with backlight 24 bit depth color ® 16 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker...
  • Page 27 Product Overview SIP-T46G/S Physical Features: 4.3” 480 x 272 pixel color display with backlight 24 bit depth color ® 16 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 36 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps Ethernet ports...
  • Page 28 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones SIP-T42G/S Physical Features: 192 x 64 graphic LCD ® 12 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 30 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys...
  • Page 29 Product Overview SIP-T41P/S Physical Features: 192 x 64 graphic LCD ® 6 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 30 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100Mbps Ethernet ports 1*RJ12 (6P6C) EHS36 headset adapter port 10 LEDs: 1*power, 6*line, 1*mute, 1*headset, 1*speakerphone...
  • Page 30 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones SIP-T40P/G Physical Features: 132 x 64 graphic LCD ® 3 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 27 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys...
  • Page 31 Product Overview SIP-T29G Physical Features: 4.3” 480 x 272 pixel color display with backlight 24 bit depth color ® 16 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 37 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps Ethernet ports...
  • Page 32 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones SIP-T27P/G Physical Features: 240 x 120 graphic LCD ® 6 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 35 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys...
  • Page 33 Product Overview SIP-T23P/G Physical Features: 132 x 64 graphic LCD with 4-level grayscales ® 3 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 27 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps Ethernet ports (1000Mbps is only applicable to SIP-T23G IP phones)
  • Page 34 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones SIP-T21(P) E2 Physical Features: 132 x 64 graphic LCD ® 2 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible 26 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 4 LEDs: 1*power, 2*line, 1*message HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker...
  • Page 35 Product Overview SIP-T19(P) E2 Physical Features: 132 x 64 graphic LCD ® Single VoIP account, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible 24 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1 LED: 1*power HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100Mbps Ethernet ports Power adapter: AC 100~240V input and DC 5V/600mA output...

  • Page 36: Key Features Of Ip Phones

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones In addition to physical features introduced above, IP phones also support the following key features when running the latest firmware: Phone Features  Call Options: emergency call, call waiting, call hold, call mute, call forward, call transfer, call pickup, call park, three-way conference.

  • Page 37: Expansion Modules

    This section introduces EXP20 and EXP40 expansion modules. The expansion modules are consoles you can connect to Yealink IP phones to add DSS keys, which can be used to assign predefined functionalities for quickly accessing features. If you want to configure the expansion module keys, you have to connect the expansion module(s) to the IP phone in advance.
  • Page 38 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones EXP20 Physical Features: Rich visual experience with 160 x 320 graphic LCD 20 physical keys each with a dual-color LED 20 additional keys through page switch Daisy-chain 6 modules up to 120 physical keys Expansion module (≤2) is powered by the host phone...
  • Page 39 Product Overview Physical Features: Rich visual experience with 160 x 320 graphic LCD 20 physical keys each with a dual-color LED 20 additional keys through page switch Support up to 6 modules daisy-chain Expansion module (≤2) is powered by the host phone 2*RJ-12 (6P6C) ports for data in and out Wall Mount...
  • Page 40 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones...

  • Page 41: Getting Started

    Since the IP phone is a data terminal, digitized audio being just another type of data from its perspective, the phone is capable of vastly more than traditional business phones. Moreover, Yealink IP phones run the same protocols as your office personal computer, which means that many innovative applications can be developed without resorting to specialized technology.

  • Page 42: Connecting The Ip Phones

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones There are many ways to set up a phone network using Yealink IP phones. The following shows an example of a network setup: Connecting the IP Phones This section introduces how to install SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T29G/T27P/T27G/T23P/T23G/T2 1(P) E2/T19(P) E2 IP phones with components in packaging contents.

  • Page 43: Attaching The Stand And The Optional Wall Mount Bracket

    Getting Started Connect the optional USB flash drive (only applicable to SIP-T48S/T48G/T46S/T46G/T29G IP phones) The optional accessories are not included in packaging contents. You need to purchase them Note separately if required. To attach the stand and the optional wall mount bracket: For SIP-T48G/S: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 44 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones For SIP-T46G/S: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 45 Getting Started For SIP-T42G/T41P/T40P/T40G: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 46 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones For SIP-T42S/T41S: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 47 Getting Started For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 48 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones For SIP-T23P/T23G: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 49 Getting Started For SIP-T21(P) E2: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)

  • Page 50: Connecting The Handset And Optional Headset

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones For SIP-T19(P) E2: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional) The hookswitch tab has a lip which allows the handset to stay on-hook when the IP phone is Note mounted vertically.
  • Page 51 The EXT port on SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones can also be used to connect the expansion module EXP40. The EXT port on SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones can also be used to connect the expansion module EXP20. For more information on how to connect the EXP40/EXP20, refer to Yealink EXP-specific user guide...

  • Page 52: Connecting The Power And Network

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones For SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2: For SIP-T19(P) E2: AC Power (Optional) To connect the AC power and network: Connect the DC plug of the power adapter to the DC5V port on the IP phone and connect the other end of the power adapter into an electrical power outlet.
  • Page 53 Getting Started SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T29G/T27P/T27G/T23P/T23 G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2: The IP phone should be used with Yealink original power adapter only. The use of the third-party Note power adapter may cause the damage to the phone. You can also connect the SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phone to a wireless network Yealink phone-specific user according to your office environment.
  • Page 54 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T29G/T27P/T27G/T23P/T23 G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2: If in-line power switch/hub is provided, you don’t need to connect the phone to the power Note adapter. Make sure the switch/hub is PoE-compliant. The IP phone can also share the network with another network device such as a PC (personal computer).

  • Page 55: Connecting The Optional Usb Flash Drive (Only Applicable To Sip-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G Ip Phones)

    For more information on how to use the BT40, refer to Guide Wi-Fi USB dongle WF40 can only be used on the SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. For Yealink Wi-Fi USB Dongle WF40 User Guide more information on how to use the WF40, refer to Initialization Process Overview The initialization process of the IP phone is responsible for network connectivity and operation of the IP phone in your local network.
  • Page 56 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configuring the VLAN If the IP phone is connected to a switch, the switch notifies the IP phone of the VLAN information defined on the switch (if using LLDP or CDP). The IP phone can then proceed with the DHCP request for its network settings (if using DHCP).

  • Page 57: Verifying Startup

    Getting Started Contact files  For more information on resource files, refer to Resource Files on page 129. Verifying Startup After connected to the power and network, the IP phone begins the initializing process by cycling through the following steps: The power indicator LED illuminates solid red.
  • Page 58 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones...

  • Page 59: Setting Up Your System

    It also provides instructions on how to set up a provisioning server, how to deploy Yealink IP phones from the provisioning server, how to upgrade firmware, and how to keep user personalized settings after auto provisioning.

  • Page 60: Dhcp

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a network protocol used to dynamically allocate network parameters to network hosts. The automatic allocation of network parameters to hosts eases the administrative burden of maintaining an IP network. IP phones comply with the DHCP specifications documented in 2131.
  • Page 61 Setting Up Your System To configure DHCP via web user interface: Click on Network->Basic. In the IPv4 Config block, mark the DHCP radio box. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone.
  • Page 62 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones rk&q=load Configure the static DNS feature. Phone User Interface Configure static DNS address. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.static_dns_enable 0 or 1 Description: Triggers the static DNS feature to on or off.
  • Page 63 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the secondary IPv4 DNS server. Example: static.network.secondary_dns = 202.101.103.54 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter "static.network.static_dns_enable" is set to 1 (On). If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Network->Basic->IPv4 Config->Static IP Address->Secondary DNS Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 64: Dhcp Option

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Press the Save soft key to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone.
  • Page 65 If no DHCP servers respond, the INFORM query process will retry and eventually time out. DHCP Option 66 and Option 43 Yealink IP phones support obtaining the provisioning server address by detecting DHCP options during startup. The phone will automatically detect the option 66 and option 43 for obtaining the provisioning server address.
  • Page 66 Click Confirm to accept the change. DHCP Option 42 and Option 2 Yealink IP phones support using the NTP server address offered by DHCP. DHCP option 42 is used to specify a list of NTP servers available to the client by IP address. NTP servers should be listed in order of preference.
  • Page 67 Setting Up Your System Procedure DHCP option 12 hostname can be configured using the following methods. Configure the DHCP option 12 hostname. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) static.network.dhcp_host_name Configure the DHCP option 12 hostname. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=f eatures-general&q=load Details of Configuration Parameter:...
  • Page 68 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default The default value is SIP-T40P. For SIP-T40G IP phones: The default value is SIP-T40G. For SIP-T29G IP phones: The default value is SIP-T29G. For SIP-T27P IP phones: The default value is SIP-T27P.

  • Page 69: Configuring Network Parameters Manually

    Setting Up Your System Enter the desired host name in the DHCP Hostname field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. If DHCP is disabled or IP phones cannot obtain network parameters from the DHCP server, you need to configure them manually.
  • Page 70 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones static.network.internet_port.gateway static.network.primary_dns static.network.secondary_dns Configure network parameters of the IP phone manually. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=network&q =load Configure network parameters of the IP phone Phone User Interface manually. Details of Configuration Parameters:...
  • Page 71 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->WAN Port->IP Mode static.network.internet_port.ip IPv4 Address Blank Description: Configures the IPv4 address. Example: static.network.internet_port.ip = 192.168.1.20 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.ip_address_mode” is set to 0 (IPv4) or 2 (IPv4 &...
  • Page 72 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default (IPv4) or 2 (IPv4 & IPv6), and “static.network.internet_port.type” is set to 2 (Static IP Address). If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 73 Setting Up Your System To configure the IP address mode via web user interface: Click on Network->Basic. Select desired value from the pull-down list of Mode(IPv4/IPv6). Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone.

  • Page 74: Configuring Transmission Methods Of The Internet Port And Pc Port

    A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. Yealink IP phones support two Ethernet ports: Internet port and PC port. You can enable or disable the PC port on the IP phones. Three optional methods of transmission configuration for...
  • Page 75 Setting Up Your System Half-duplex Half-duplex transmission refers to transmitting voice or data in both directions, but in one direction at a time; this means one device can send data on the line, but not receive data simultaneously. You can configure the half-duplex transmission on both Internet port and PC port for the IP phone to transmit in 10Mbps or 100Mbps.
  • Page 76 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configure the transmission methods of the Ethernet ports. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=networ k-adv&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.internet_port.speed_duplex 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 Description: Configures the transmission method of the Internet port.
  • Page 77 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default 5-Full Duplex 1000Mbps (only applicable to SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T40G/T29G/T27G/T23G IP phones) Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.pc_port.enable” is set to 1 (Auto Negotiation). For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T40G/T29G/T27G/T23G IP phones, you can set the transmission speed to 1000Mbps/Auto Negotiation to transmit in 1000Mbps if the IP phone is connected to the switch supports Gigabit Ethernet.

  • Page 78: Configuring Pc Port Mode

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones The PC port on the back of the IP phone is used to connect a PC. You can enable or disable the PC port on the IP phones via web user interface or using configuration files.

  • Page 79: Web Server Type

    Setting Up Your System Select Auto Negotiation from the pull-down list of PC Port Active. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. To disable the PC port via web user interface: Click on Network->PC Port.
  • Page 80 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones When you enable user to access web user interface of the IP phone using the HTTP/HTTPS protocol (take HTTPS protocol for example): When you disable user to access web user interface of the IP phone using the HTTP/HTTPS...
  • Page 81 Setting Up Your System Configure the web access type, HTTP Phone User Interface port and HTTPS port. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.wui.http_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the user to access web user interface of the IP phone using the HTTP protocol.
  • Page 82 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->Web Server->HTTPS Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->Web Server->HTTPS Status static.network.port.https Integer from 1 to 65535 Description: Configures the HTTPS port for the user to access web user interface of the IP phone using the HTTPS protocol.

  • Page 83: Wi-Fi

    Setting Up Your System Enter the desired HTTPS port number in the HTTPS Port(1~65535) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. To configure web server type via phone user interface: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->Web Server.
  • Page 84 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones can store up to 5 frequently-used wireless networks on your phone and specify the priority for them. To use Wi-Fi feature, make sure the Wi-Fi USB dongle is properly connected to the USB port on Note the back of the phone.
  • Page 85 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-Enabled Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: Network->WiFi->WiFi Active Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Wi-Fi->Wi-Fi static.wifi.X.label String within 31 Blank characters (X ranges from 1 to 5) Description: Configures the profile name of the wireless network X for the IP phone.
  • Page 86 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default only applicable to SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: Network->WiFi->Change Priority Phone User Interface: None static.wifi.X.security_mode NONE, WEP, WPA-PSK NONE or WPA2-PSK (X ranges from 1 to 5) Description: Configures the security mode of the wireless network X.
  • Page 87 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the password of the wireless network X. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.wifi.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled) and “static.wifi.X.security_mode” is set to WEP, WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK. It is only applicable to SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones.
  • Page 88 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Enter the desired password in the PSK field. Click Add to accept the change. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to add more wireless networks. To adjust the priority of the added wireless network via web user interface: Click on Network->Wi-Fi.

  • Page 89: Vlan

    In addition to manual configuration, the IP phone also supports automatic discovery of VLAN via LLDP, CDP or DHCP. The assignment takes effect in this order: assignment via LLDP/CDP, manual configuration, then assignment via DHCP. VLAN Feature on Yealink IP Phones For more information on VLAN, refer to Procedure VLAN assignment method can be configured using the configuration files.
  • Page 90 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default static.network.vlan.vlan_change.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to obtain VLAN ID using lower priority of VLAN assignment method or disable VLAN feature when the IP phone cannot obtain VLAN ID using the current VLAN assignment method.
  • Page 91 Setting Up Your System (Configuration File) Parameters: static.network.lldp.enable static.network.lldp.packet_interval Configure LLDP feature. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p= network-adv&q=load Configure LLDP feature. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.lldp.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the LLDP (Linker Layer Discovery Protocol) feature on the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will attempt to determine its VLAN ID through LLDP.
  • Page 92 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->LLDP->Packet Interval To configure LLDP feature via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced. In the LLDP block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of Active.
  • Page 93 Setting Up Your System Procedure CDP can be configured using the following methods. Configure CDP feature. Central Provisioning Parameters: <y0000000000xx>.cfg static.network.cdp.enable (Configuration File) static.network.cdp.packet_interval Configure CDP feature. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p= network-adv&q=load Configure CDP feature. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values...
  • Page 94 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->CDP->Packet Interval (1~3600s) Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->CDP->Packet Interval To configure CDP via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced. In the CDP block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of Active.
  • Page 95 Setting Up Your System Procedure VLAN can be configured using the following methods. Configure VLAN for the Internet port and PC port manually. Parameters: static.network.vlan.internet_port_enable Central <y0000000000xx> static.network.vlan.internet_port_vid Provisioning .cfg static.network.vlan.internet_port_priority (Configuration File) static.network.vlan.pc_port_enable static.network.vlan.pc_port_vid static.network.vlan.pc_port_priority Configure VLAN for the Internet port and PC port manually.
  • Page 96 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures VLAN ID for the Internet port. Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->VLAN->WAN Port->VID (1-4094)
  • Page 97 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default 4094 Description: Configures VLAN ID for the PC port. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.pc_port.enable” is set to 1 (Auto Negotiation). If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 98 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired value (0-7) from the pull-down list of Priority. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.
  • Page 99 Setting Up Your System Status field. Enter the VLAN ID (1-4094) in the VID Number field. Enter the priority value (0-7) in the Priority field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone.
  • Page 100 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default effect. Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->VLAN->DHCP VLAN->Active Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->VLAN->DHCP VLAN->DHCP VLAN static.network.vlan.dhcp_option Integer from 1 to 255 Description: Configures the DHCP option from which the IP phone will obtain the VLAN settings. You can configure at most five DHCP options and separate them by commas.

  • Page 101: Ipv6 Support

    IPv6 is developed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) to deal with the long-anticipated problem of IPv4 address exhaustion. Yealink IP Phone supports IPv4 addressing mode, IPv6 addressing mode, as well as an IPv4&IPv6 dual stack addressing mode. IPv4 uses a 32-bit address, consisting of four groups of three decimal digits separated by dots;...
  • Page 102 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones out Router Advertisement announcements onto the link. These announcements can allow the on-link connected IP phone to configure itself with IPv6 address, as specified in RFC 4862. Stateful DHCPv6: The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) has been ...
  • Page 103 Setting Up Your System Configure the IPv6 static DNS address. Parameters: static.network.ipv6_primary_dns static.network.ipv6_secondary_dns Configure the IPv6 static DNS. <y0000000000xx>.cf Parameter: static.network.ipv6_static_dns_enable Configure the IPv6 address assignment method. Configure the IPv6 static DNS address. Configure the IPv6 static DNS. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=net work&q=load...
  • Page 104 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Description: Configures the Internet port type for IPv6. 0-DHCP 1-Static IP Address Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.ip_address_mode” is set to 1 (IPv6) or 2 (IPv4 & IPv6). If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 105 Setting Up Your System Permitted Parameters Default Values 1 (IPv6) or 2 (IPv4 & IPv6), and "static.network.ipv6_internet_port.type" is set to 1 (Static IP Address). If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Network->Basic->IPv6 Config->Static IP Address->IP Address Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 106 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values IP) ->Default Gateway static.network.ipv6_primary_dns IPv6 address Blank Description: Configures the primary IPv6 DNS server. Example: static.network.ipv6_primary_dns = 3036:1:1:c3c7: c11c:5447:23a6:256 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter "static.network.ip_address_mode" is set to 1 (IPv6) or 2 (IPv4 &...
  • Page 107 Setting Up Your System Permitted Parameters Default Values static.network.ipv6_icmp_v6.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to obtain IPv6 network settings via SLAAC (Stateless Address Autoconfiguration) method. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 108 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones In the IPv6 Config block, mark the DHCP or the Static IP Address radio box. If you mark the Static IP Address radio box, configure the IPv6 address and other configuration parameters in the corresponding fields.
  • Page 109 Setting Up Your System To configure SLAAC feature via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced. In the ICMPv6 Status block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of Active. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone.

  • Page 110: Vpn

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Enter the desired value in the Pri.DNS and Sec.DNS field respectively. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.
  • Page 111 (ca.crt and client.crt), key (client.key) and the configuration file (vpn.cnf) of the VPN client. The following table lists the unified directories of the OpenVPN certificates and key in the configuration file (vpn.cnf) for Yealink IP phones: VPN files Description Unified Directories ca.crt...
  • Page 112 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->VPN->Active Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->VPN->VPN Active static.openvpn.url...

  • Page 113: Network Address Translation (Nat)

    Setting Up Your System Click Upload to upload the TAR file. The web user interface prompts the message “Import config…”. In the VPN block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of Active. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.

  • Page 114: Nat Types

    NAT gateways, typically required for client-to-client networking applications, especially for VoIP deployments. Yealink IP phones support three NAT traversal techniques: manual NAT, STUN and ICE. If manual NAT and STUN are all enabled, the IP phone will use the...
  • Page 115 Setting Up Your System the ICE approach to NAT traversal. Manual NAT (Static NAT) Manual NAT helps IP connections traverse NAT gateways without the third-party network server (STUN/TURN server). If manual NAT feature is enabled, the configured public IP address and port can be carried in the SIP requests or RTP packets, in which the other party obtains the phone’s public address.
  • Page 116 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones TURN (Traversal Using Relays around NAT) TURN is a network protocol described in 5766, allows a host located behind a NAT (called the TURN client) to communicate and exchange packets with other hosts (peers, called the TURN server) using a relay.
  • Page 117 Setting Up Your System media path in the same network would be chosen, which will probably have better quality than the long one. ICE is a complex solution to the problem of NAT traversal. Due to its complexity there is very limited client support for ICE today.
  • Page 118 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones sip.nat_turn.password Configure local SIP port and TLS SIP port. Parameters: sip.listen_port sip.tls_listen_port Configure NAT traversal on a per-line basis. <MAC>.cfg Parameter: account.X.nat.nat_traversal Configure manual NAT feature on a phone basis. Configure ICE feature.
  • Page 119 Setting Up Your System Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default sip.nat_stun.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the STUN (Simple Traversal of UDP over NATs) feature on the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 120 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the port of the STUN (Simple Traversal of UDP over NATs) server. Example: sip.nat_stun.port = 3478 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “sip.nat_stun.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled).
  • Page 121 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Network->NAT->Nat Manual->Active Phone User Interface: None network.static_nat.addr IP address Blank Description: Configures the IP address to be advertised in SIP signaling.
  • Page 122 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default sip.nat_turn.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the TURN (Traversal Using Relays around NAT) feature on the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 123 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None sip.nat_turn.username String Blank Description: Configures the user name to authenticate to TURN (Traversal Using Relays around NAT) server. Example: sip.nat_turn.username = admin Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “sip.nat_turn.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 124 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None 0, Integer from 1024 sip.tls_listen_port 5061 to 65535 Description: Configures the local TLS listen port. If it is set to 0, the IP phone will not listen the TLS service.
  • Page 125 Setting Up Your System Enter the external IP address in the IP Address field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. To configure ICE feature via web user interface: Click on Network->NAT.
  • Page 126 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select STUN/Manual NAT from the pull-down list of NAT. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure local SIP port and TLS SIP port via web user interface: Click on Settings->SIP.
  • Page 127 Setting Up Your System Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure NAT traversal and STUN server via phone user interface: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->NAT->NAT Status. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the NAT Status field.
  • Page 128 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones ccount-adv&q=load&acc=0 Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.nat.udp_update_enable 0, 1, 2 or 3 Description: Configures the type of keep-alive packets sent by the IP phone to the NAT device to keep the communication port open so that NAT can continue to function for account X.
  • Page 129 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default account.1.nat.udp_update_time = 30 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.nat.udp_update_enable” is set to 1, 2 or 3. Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Keep Alive Interval(Seconds) Phone User Interface: None To configure the type of keep-alive packets and keep-alive interval via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced.
  • Page 130 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones account.X.nat.rport Configure NAT Rport feature on a per-line basis. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=a ccount-adv&q=load&acc=0 Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default account.X.nat.rport 0, 1 or 2 Description: Enables or disables NAT Rport feature for account X.

  • Page 131: Quality Of Service (Qos)

    Setting Up Your System Select the desired value from the pull-down list of RPort. Click Confirm to accept the change. Quality of Service (QoS) is the ability to provide different priorities for different packets in the network, allowing the transport of traffic with special requirements. QoS guarantees are important for applications that require fixed bit rate and are delay sensitive when the network capacity is insufficient.

  • Page 132: Voice Qos

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones low-loss, low-latency, low-jitter and assured bandwidth service. Assured Forwarding PHB -- defines a method by which BAs (Bandwidth Allocations) can  be given different forwarding assurances. Default PHB -- specifies that a packet marked with a DSCP value of “000000” gets the ...
  • Page 133 Setting Up Your System Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.qos.rtptos Integer from 0 to 63 Description: Configures the DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) for voice packets. The default DSCP value for RTP packets is 46 (Expedited Forwarding). Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.

  • Page 134: Authentication

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Enter the desired value in the SIP QoS (0~63) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.
  • Page 135 If the authentication server determines the credentials are valid, the IP phone is allowed to access resources located on the protected side of the network. Yealink IP phones support the following protocols for 802.1X authentication: EAP-MD5 ...
  • Page 136 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones static.network.802_1x.anonymous_identity static.network.802_1x.identity static.network.802_1x.md5_password static.network.802_1x.root_cert_url static.network.802_1x.client_cert_url Configure the 802.1X authentication. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=netwo rk-adv&q=load Configure the 802.1X authentication. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.802_1x.mode...
  • Page 137 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the EAP In-Band provisioning method for EAP-FAST. 0-Unauthenticated Provisioning 1-Authenticated Provisioning If it is set to 0 (Unauthenticated Provisioning), EAP In-Band provisioning is enabled by server unauthenticated PAC (Protected Access Credential) provisioning using anonymous Diffie-Hellman key exchange.
  • Page 138 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: static.network.802_1x.identity = yealink Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.802_1x.mode” is set to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7. If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 139 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None URL within 511 static.network.802_1x.client_cert_url Blank characters Description: Configures the access URL of the device certificate. Example: static.network.802_1x.client_cert_url = http://192.168.1.10/client.pem Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.802_1x.mode” is set to 2 (EAP-TLS).
  • Page 140 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones If you select EAP-TLS: (Optional.) Enter the anonymous user name for authentication in the Anonymous Identity field. Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. Leave the MD5 Password field blank.
  • Page 141 Setting Up Your System Click Upload to upload the certificate. If you select EAP-TTLS/EAP-MSCHAPv2: (Optional.) Enter the anonymous user name for authentication in the Anonymous Identity field. Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field. In the CA Certificates field, click Browse to select the desired CA certificate (*.pem, *.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system.
  • Page 142 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones If you select EAP-PEAP/GTC: (Optional.) Enter the anonymous user name for authentication in the Anonymous Identity field. Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field.
  • Page 143 Setting Up Your System In the CA Certificates field, click Browse to select the desired CA certificate (*.pem, *.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system. Click Upload to upload the certificate. If you select EAP-FAST: (Optional.) Enter the anonymous user name for authentication in the Anonymous Identity field.
  • Page 144 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones The CA certificate needs to be uploaded only when Authenticated Provisioning mode is selected from the Provisioning Mode field. Click Upload to upload the certificate. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 145: Setting Up Your Phones With A Provisioning Server

    Setting Up Your System If you select EAP-PEAP/GTC: Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field. If you select EAP-TTLS/EAP-GTC: Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field.

  • Page 146: Provisioning Methods

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones settings. IP phones can be configured automatically through configuration files stored on a central provisioning server, manually via web user interface or phone user interface, or by a combination of the automatic and manual methods. If a central provisioning server is not available, you can configure most features using manual method.
  • Page 147 For more information on resource files, refer to Resource Files on page 129. Yealink IP phones support keeping user personalized configuration settings using the MAC-local CFG file. For more information on this file, refer to MAC-local CFG File on page 128.

  • Page 148: Phone User Interface

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones call log files and contact files to the provisioning server. You can configure a separate directory for each of these files to help organize: a log file directory, a call log file directory and a contact file directory.

  • Page 149: Boot Files, Configuration Files And Resource Files

     Boot Files Yealink IP phones running firmware version 81 or later support a new boot file in which you can customize the download sequence of configuration files. It is efficiently for you to provision your IP phones in different deployment scenarios, especially when you want to apply a set of features or settings to a group of phones.
  • Page 150 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones include:config “http://10.2.5.206/configure/account.cfg” overwrite_mode = 1 Learn the following: The line beginning with “#” is considered to be a comment.  The file header “#!version:1.0.0.1” is not a comment and must be placed in the first line. It ...

  • Page 151: Configuration Files

    The configuration files are valid CFG files that can be created or edited using a text editor such as UltraEdit. An administrator can deploy and maintain a mass of Yealink IP phones automatically through configuration files stored on a provisioning server.
  • Page 152 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones IP Phone Model Common CFG file SIP-T21(P) E2 y000000000052.cfg SIP-T19(P) E2 y000000000053.cfg MAC-Oriented CFG File MAC-Oriented CFG file, named <MAC>.cfg, contains parameters unique to a particular phone, such as account registration. It will only be effectual for a specific IP phone.

  • Page 153: Resource Files

    Setting Up Your System Users can also select to clear the user personalized configuration settings. Users can clear the MAC-local CFG file using the following methods: To clear the MAC-local CFG file, reset the IP phone to factory configuration settings by ...
  • Page 154 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Local contact file  Input method file  For more information on resource files, refer to Obtaining Boot Files/Configuration Files/Resource Files on page 131. If you want to delete resource files from a phone at a later date - for example, if you are giving the phone to a new user - you can reset the IP phone to factory configuration settings.
  • Page 155 Obtaining Boot Files/Configuration Files/Resource Files Yealink supplies some template configuration files and resource files for you, so you can directly edit and customize the files as required. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for template files. You can also obtain the template files online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 156 For more information, refer to Loading 1.English_note.xml Language Packs on page 245. 1.English.js ime.txt Allow you to customize the existing input method on Yealink IP Keypad Input Russian_ime.txt phones. For more information, refer to Keypad Input Method Method File Customization on page 254.
  • Page 157 Setting Up Your System Template File Description File Name information, refer to Customizing a Directory Template File on page 311. Allows you to customize the search source list for your IP phone. For Super Search super_search.xml more information, refer to Customizing a Super Search Template File Template on page 315.

  • Page 158: Setting Up A Provisioning Server

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones To download template files: Go to Yealink Document Download page and select the desired phone model. Download and extract the combined files to your local system. For example, the following illustration shows the template files available for SIP-T46G IP phones running firmware version 81.
  • Page 159 Configuring Basic Features Supported Provisioning Protocols  Configuring a Provisioning Server  Deploying Phones from the Provisioning Server  Why Using a Provisioning Server? You can use a provisioning server to configure your IP phones. A provisioning server allows for flexibility in upgrading, maintaining and configuring the phone.

  • Page 160: Deploying Phones From The Provisioning Server

    Otherwise, configurations may not take effect, and the IP phone will behave without exception. Before you configure parameters in the configuration files, Yealink recommends that you create new configuration files containing only those parameters that require changes.

  • Page 161: Upgrading Firmware

    Configuring Basic Features Edit the parameters in the file as desired. Create new common configuration files by performing the following steps: Create <y0000000000xx>.cfg files by using the Common CFG file from the distribution as templates. Edit the parameters in the file as desired. Copy boot files and configuration files to the home directory of the provisioning server.
  • Page 162 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Automatically, from the provisioning server for a mass of phones.  The following table lists the associated and latest firmware name for each IP phone model (X is replaced by the actual firmware version).
  • Page 163 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods. Configure the way for the IP phone to check for configuration files. Parameters: static.auto_provision.power_on static.auto_provision.repeat.enable static.auto_provision.repeat.minutes static.auto_provision.weekly.enable static.auto_provision.weekly_upgrade_interval Central static.auto_provision.inactivity_time_expire Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cf static.auto_provision.weekly.begin_time (Configuration static.auto_provision.weekly.end_time File) static.auto_provision.weekly.dayofweek static.auto_provision.flexible.enable static.auto_provision.flexible.interval static.auto_provision.flexible.begin_time...
  • Page 164 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Triggers the power on feature to on or off. 0-Off 1-On If it is set to 1 (On), the IP phone will perform an auto provisioning process when powered Web User Interface: Settings->Auto Provision->Power On...
  • Page 165 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Triggers the weekly feature to on or off. 0-Off 1-On If it is set to 1 (On), the IP phone will perform an auto provisioning process weekly. Web User Interface: Settings->Auto Provision->Weekly Phone User Interface: None static.auto_provision.weekly_upgrade_interval...
  • Page 166 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default phone on office hour. It works only if the value of the parameter “static.auto_provision.weekly.enable” is set to 1 (On). Web User Interface: Settings->Auto Provision->Inactivity Time Expire(0~120min) Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 167 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-Monday 2-Tuesday 3-Wednesday 4-Thursday 5-Friday 6-Saturday Example: static.auto_provision.weekly.dayofweek = 01 If the value of the patameter “static.auto_provision.weekly_upgrade_interval” is set to 0, it means the IP phone will perform an auto provisioning process every Sunday and Monday. If the value of the patameter “static.auto_provision.weekly_upgrade_interval”...
  • Page 168 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None Integer from 1 to static.auto_provision.flexible.interval 1000 Description: Configures the interval (in days) for the IP phone to perform an auto provisioning process. The auto provisioning occurs on a random day within this period based on the phone's MAC address.
  • Page 169 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default process at the starting time. If it is set to a specific value greater than starting time configured by the parameter “static.auto_provision.weekly.begin_time”, the IP phone will perform an auto provisioning process at random between the starting time and ending time. It it is set to a specific value less than starting time configured by the parameter “static.auto_provision.weekly.begin_time”, the IP phone will perform an auto provisioning process at random between the starting time on that day and ending time in the next day.
  • Page 170 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Make the desired change. Click Confirm to accept the change. When the “Power On” is set to On, the IP phone will check boot files and configuration files stored on the provisioning server during startup and then will download firmware from the server.

  • Page 171: Keeping User Personalized Settings After Auto Provisioning

    IP phones as example for reference. Note Yealink IP phones support FTP, TFTP, HTTP and HTTPS protocols for uploading the <MAC>-local.cfg file. This section takes the TFTP protocol as an example. Before performing the following, make sure the provisioning server supports uploading.
  • Page 172 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configuration Parameters The following table lists the configuration parameters used to determine the phone behavior for keeping user personalized settings: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.auto_provision.custom.protect 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to keep user personalized settings after auto provisioning.
  • Page 173 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None Phone User Interface: None static.auto_provision.custom.sync.path Blank Description: Configures the URL for uploading/downloading the <MAC>-local.cfg file. If it is left blank, the IP phone will try to upload/download the <MAC>-local.cfg file to/from the root directory of provisioning server. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter "static.auto_provision.custom.sync"...
  • Page 174 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Scenario A Keep user personalized configuration settings The administrator wishes to upgrade firmware from the old version to the latest version. Meanwhile, keep user personalized settings after auto provisioning and upgrade.
  • Page 175 Configuring Basic Features process again which is triggered by phone reboot (the power on mode is enabled by default). It downloads the y000000000028.cfg, 001565770984.cfg and the 001565770984-local.cfg file in sequence from the provisioning server, and then updates configurations in these downloaded configuration files orderly to the IP phone system. The IP phone starts up successfully, and the personalized settings in the 001565770984-local.cfg file are kept after auto provisioning.
  • Page 176 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones When a user customizes feature configurations via web/phone user interface, the IP phone will save the personalized settings to the 001565770984-local.cfg file on the IP phone only. Note In this scenario, the IP phone will not upload the <MAC>-local.cfg file to provisioning server and request to download the <MAC>-local.cfg file from provisioning server during auto provisioning.
  • Page 177 Configuring Basic Features The LCD screen prompts “Reset local settings?”. Press the OK soft key. The LCD screen prompts “Reset local settings, Please wait…”. To clear personalized configuration settings via web user interface: Click on Settings->Upgrade. Click Reset local settings. The web user interface prompts “Clear local.cfg settings?”.
  • Page 178 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Scenario C Keep user personalized settings after factory reset The IP phone requires factory reset when it has a breakdown, but the user wishes to keep personalized settings of the phone after factory reset.
  • Page 179 Configuring Basic Features Click Reset to factory to reset the phone. The web user interface prompts “Do you want to reset to factory?”. Click OK. After startup, all configurations of the phone will be reset to factory defaults. So the value of the parameter “static.auto_provision.custom.sync”...
  • Page 180 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Provisioning server URL: tftp://192.168.1.211  As the personalized settings of the phone cannot be changed via auto provisioning when the Note value of the parameter “static.auto_provision.custom.protect” is set to 1, it is cautious to change the settings in the <MAC>-local.cfg file before importing it.
  • Page 181 Configuring Basic Features saved to the phone flash and take effect. If the value of the parameter “static.auto_provision.custom.sync” is set to 1, and the Note 001565770984-local.cfg file is successfully imported, the new 001565770984-local.cfg file will be uploaded to the provisioning server and overrides the existing one on the server.
  • Page 182 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones...

  • Page 183: Configuring Basic Features

    Configuring Basic Features Configuring Basic Features This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following basic features: Power Indicator LED  Notification Popups  Contrast  Wallpaper  Transparency  Screen Saver  Power Saving  Backlight  Bluetooth ...
  • Page 184 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Search Source List In Dialing  Call Log  Call List Show Number  Missed Call Log  Local Directory  Live Dialpad  Speed Dial  Call Waiting  Auto Redial ...

  • Page 185: Power Indicator Led

    Configuring Basic Features Group Call Pickup  Dialog Info Call Pickup  Recent Call In Dialing  ReCall  Call Number Filter  Call Park  Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP)  Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP)  Mute  Intercom ...
  • Page 186 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Voice/Text Mail Power Light Flash Voice/Text Mail Power Light Flash allows the power indicator LED to flash when the IP phone receives a voice mail or a text message. Mute Power Light Flash Mute Power Light Flash allows the power indicator LED to flash when a call is muted.
  • Page 187 Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values phone_setting.common_power_led_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the power indicator LED to be turned on. SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T29G/T27P/T27G/T23 P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: 0-Disabled (power indicator LED is off) 1-Enabled (power indicator LED is solid red) For SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones: 0-Disabled (power indicator LED is off) 1-Enabled (power indicator LED is solid yellow)
  • Page 188 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values phone_setting.mail_power_led_flash_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the power indicator LED to flash when the IP phone receives a voice mail or a text message. SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T29G/T27P/T27G/T23...
  • Page 189 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Enables or disables the power indicator LED to flash when a call is placed on hold or is held. SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T29G/T27P/T27G/T23 P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: 0-Disabled (power indicator LED does not flash) 1-Enabled ( power indicator LED fast flashes (500ms) red) For SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones: 0-Disabled (power indicator LED does not flash) 1-Enabled ( power indicator LED fast flashes (500ms) yellow)
  • Page 190 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values 0-Disabled (power indicator LED does not flash) 1-Enabled (power indicator LED slowly flashes (1000ms) red) For SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones: 0-Disabled (power indicator LED does not flash)

  • Page 191: Notification Popups

    Configuring Basic Features Notification Popups Notification popups feature allows the IP phone to display the pop-up message box when it misses a call, forwards an incoming call to other party or receives a new voice mail or a new text message.
  • Page 192 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values 1-Enabled Note: If the voice mail pop-up message box disappears, it won't pop up again unless the user receives a new voice mail or the user re-registers the account that has unread voice mail(s).

  • Page 193: Contrast

    Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.text_message.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Features->Notification Popups->Display Text Message Popup Phone User Interface: None To configure the notification popups via web user interface: Click on Features->Notification Popups.
  • Page 194 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones E2 IP phones, EXP20 connected to SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones and EXP40 connected to SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones. Make sure the expansion module has been connected to the IP phone before adjustment. It is not applicable to SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S IP phones.

  • Page 195: Wallpaper

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default For SIP-T40P/T40G/T27P/T27G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2: Settings->Preference->Contrast Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Display->Contrast To configure contrast via web user interface (take SIP-T23G IP phones for example): Click on Settings->Preference. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Contrast. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 196 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones You can set the wallpaper for the SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones idle screen (for T48G/S, the DSS key list is folded). You can also separately set the wallpaper for the SIP-T48G/S IP phones when the DSS key list is unfolded, avoiding the display of the line key labels to be blocked by the background image.
  • Page 197 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Wallpaper can be configured using the following methods. Configure the wallpaper displayed on the IP phone. Parameter: phone_setting.backgrounds Specify the access URL of the custom wallpaper. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>. Parameter: (Configuration File) wallpaper_upload.url Configure the wallpaper with DSSkey unfold.
  • Page 198 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Permitted Values: Default.jpg, 01.jpg, 02.jpg, 03.jpg, 04.jpg, 05.jpg, 06.jpg, 07.jpg, 08.jpg, 09.jpg or 10.jpg or custom wallpaper name (e.g., wallpaper.jpg) Example: phone_setting.backgrounds = Default.jpg Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones.

  • Page 199: Transparency

    Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T48G/S IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Preference->Wallpaper with DSSkey unfold Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Display->Dsskey Wallpaper To upload custom wallpaper via web user interface (take SIP-T48G IP phones for example): Click on Settings->Preference.
  • Page 200 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones experience of the idle screen display. Users can choose an appropriate transparency for DSS key labels and status bar on the idle screen as required. The transparency is only applicable to SIP-T48G/T48S IP phones.
  • Page 201 Configuring Basic Features =settings-preference&q=load Configure the transparency of the Phone User Interface LCD screen. Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default 0%, 20%, 40%, phone_setting.idle_dsskey_and_title.transparency 100% 60%, 80% or 100% Description: Configures the transparency of the DSS key labels and status bar on the idle screen for the IP phone.

  • Page 202: Screen Saver

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Screen Saver The screen saver will automatically start when the IP phone is idle for a certain amount of time if you have configured the screensaver wait time. You can stop the screen saver and return to the idle screen at any time by pressing a key on the phone or tapping the touch screen (touch screen is only applicable to SIP-T48G/S IP phones).
  • Page 203 Configuring Basic Features Specify the access URL of the custom screen saver image. Parameter: screensaver.upload_url Delete custom screen saver image. Parameter: screensaver.delete Configure the IP phone to display the clock and icons when the screen saver starts. Parameter: screensaver.display_clock.enable Configure the interval for the IP phone to change the picture when the screen saver starts.
  • Page 204 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 3600, 7200, 10800, 21600 Description: Configures the time (in seconds) to wait in the idle state before the screen saver starts. 15-15s 30-30s 60-1min 120-2min 300-5min 600-10min...
  • Page 205 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default URL within 511 screensaver.upload_url Blank characters Description: Configures the access URL of the custom screen saver image. Example: screensaver.upload_url = http://192.168.10.25/Screencapture.jpg During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the HTTP provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the screen saver image “Screencapture.jpg”.
  • Page 206 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default screensaver.display_clock.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the clock and icons when the screen saver starts. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T48G/S, SIP-T46G/S and SIP-T29G IP phones.
  • Page 207 Configuring Basic Features To upload custom screen saver via web user interface: Click on Settings->Preference. Select Custom from the pull-down list of Screensaver Type. In the Upload Screensaver field, click Browse to locate the custom picture from your local system. Click Upload to upload the file.
  • Page 208 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select System from the pull-down list of Screensaver Type. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the screen saver wait time and screensaver display clock via web user interface: Click on Settings->Preference.

  • Page 209: Power Saving

    Configuring Basic Features Time field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Display Clock field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Screensaver Type field. This field is available only if you have uploaded custom image file(s) via web user interface. Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
  • Page 210 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure Power saving can be configured using the following methods. Configure the power saving intelligent mode. Parameter: features.power_saving.intelligent_mode Configure the power saving feature. Parameter: features.power_saving.enable Configure the office hour. Parameters: features.power_saving.office_hour.monday features.power_saving.office_hour.tuesday...
  • Page 211 Configuring Basic Features Description: Enables or disables the power saving intelligent mode. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone stays in power-saving mode even if the office hour arrives the next day. If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will automatically identify the office hour and exit power-saving mode once the office hour arrives the next day.
  • Page 212 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Settings->Power Saving->Office Hour Idle TimeOut Phone User Interface: None Integer features.power_saving.off_hour.idle_timeout from 1 to 10 Description: Configures the time (in minutes) to wait in the idle state before the IP phone enters power-saving mode during the non-office hours.

  • Page 213: Backlight

    Configuring Basic Features Description: Configures the starting time and ending time of the day’s office hour. Starting time and ending time are separated by a comma. Example: features.power_saving.office_hour.monday = 7,19 Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Power Saving->Monday/Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/Saturday/Sunday Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 214 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones dark environments. Backlight time specifies the delay time to change the intensity of the LCD screen when the IP phone is inactive. Backlight turns off quickly if a short backlight time is configured, this may not give users enough time to read messages.
  • Page 215 Configuring Basic Features Phone Model (and Configuration Configuration Options the connected Methods expansion module) T41P/S Web User Interface T40P/G Phone User Interface T23P/G T21(P) E2 Procedure Backlight can be configured using the following methods. Configure the backlight of the LCD screen. Parameters: Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.c...
  • Page 216 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Basic->Display->Backlight->Active Level phone_setting.inactive_backlight_level 0 or 1 Description: Configures the intensity of the LCD screen when the phone is inactive. 0-Off 1-Low For T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones, it configures the LCD’s intensity of the IP phone and the connected EXP40.
  • Page 217 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default has been inactivated for 60 seconds. For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G: The default value is 0. For SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T27P/T27G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2: The default value is 30. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Preference->Backlight Time(seconds) Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Display->Backlight->Backlight Time...

  • Page 218: Bluetooth

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Bluetooth Bluetooth enables low-bandwidth wireless connections within a range of 10 meters (32 feet). The best performance is in the 1 to 2 meters (3 to 6 feet) range. You can activate/deactivate the Bluetooth mode and then pair and connect the Bluetooth headset with your phone.
  • Page 219 Description: Configures the Bluetooth device name. For SIP-T48G IP phones: The default value is Yealink T48G. For SIP-T48S IP phones: The default value is Yealink T48S. For SIP-T46G IP phones: The default value is Yealink T46G. For SIP-T46S IP phones: The default value is Yealink T46S.

  • Page 220: Page Switch Key

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Bluetooth Active. Click Confirm to accept the change. To activate the Bluetooth mode via phone user interface: Press Menu->Basic->Bluetooth. Press , or the Switch soft key to select On from the Bluetooth field.

  • Page 221: Enable Page Tips

    Configuring Basic Features You can configure the line key in the right bottom to be fixed as a switch page key. Then you can always use this key. It is especially useful for users who need to configure multi-page line keys.
  • Page 222 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones The following shows the page icons: The following table lists the page icons to indicate different statuses: Phone Models Icons Description Fast-flashing: the BLF monitored user receives an incoming call on the non-current page.

  • Page 223: Label Length

    Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default phone_setting.page_tip 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the page icon and page switch key LED to indicate different states of line keys on the non-current page. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones.
  • Page 224 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones line. For SIP-T48G/S IP phones, the display length of the line key label will be automatically extended in two lines. Label length is only applicable to SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. When label length feature is set to Default (for SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G):...
  • Page 225 Configuring Basic Features When label length feature is set to Default (for SIP-T48G/S): When label length feature is set to Extended (for SIP-T48G/S): Procedure Label length can be configured using the following methods. Configure label length. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) features.config_dsskey_length Configure label length.
  • Page 226 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the extended length of the label displayed on the idle LCD screen for the line key. 0-Default 1-Extended 2-Mid-range (only applicable to SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones)

  • Page 227: Account Registration

    Account Registration Registering an account makes it easier for the IP phones to receive an incoming call or dial an outgoing call. Yealink IP phones support registering multiple accounts on a phone; each account requires an extension or phone number.

  • Page 228: Sip Account

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure SIP Account registration can be configured using the following methods. Configure the SIP account registration information. Parameters: account.X.enable account.X.label account.X.display_name account.X.auth_name account.X.user_name account.X.password Central Provisioning <MAC>.cfg account.X.sip_server.Y.address (Configuration File) account.X.sip_server.Y.port account.X.outbound_proxy_enable...
  • Page 229 Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2)
  • Page 230 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the display name to be displayed on the called party’s LCD screen for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S)
  • Page 231 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Note: The register user name is provided by ITSP.
  • Page 232 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Example: account.1.sip_server.1.address = 10.2.1.48 Web User Interface: Account->Register->SIP Server Y->Server Host Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Accounts->SIP ServerY...
  • Page 233 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Web User Interface: Account->Register->Enable Outbound Proxy Server...
  • Page 234 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Example: account.1.outbound_proxy.1.port = 5060 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.outbound_proxy_enable”...
  • Page 235 Configuring Basic Features and SIP Server1/2 field respectively. If you use outbound proxy servers, do the following: Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Enable Outbound Proxy Server. Enter the desired IP address or domain name in the Outbound Proxy Server 1/2 field and the desired port of the outbound proxy server 1/2 in the Port field respectively.

  • Page 236: Multiple Line Keys Per Account

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Enter the desired interval in the SIP Registration Retry Timer(0~1800s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To register an account via phone user interface: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Accounts.
  • Page 237 Configuring Basic Features The number of the DSS keys associated with an account must meet the following: Ext Key (with expansion Phone Model Line Key modules connected) SIP-T48G/S <=29 <=240 SIP-T46G/S <=27 <=240 SIP-T29G <=27 <=228 SIP-T27P/G <=21 <=228 SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S <=15 SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G <=3...
  • Page 238 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameter: phone_setting.call_appearance.conferenc e_via_new_linekey Configure the number of DSS keys to be assigned automatically. Parameter: account.X.number_of_linekey Configure whether to transfer a call using a new line key on a per-line basis. Parameter: <MAC>.cfg...
  • Page 239 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values “account.X.number_of_linekey”. It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Auto Linekeys Phone User Interface: None String account.X.number_of_linekey within 32 characters Description: Configures the number of DSS keys to be assigned with Line type automatically from the first unused one (unused one means the DSS key is configured as N/A or Line).
  • Page 240 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will transfer a call by automatically selecting a new line key (the corresponding line key is not seized) instead of the current line key. If all line keys are seized, the current line key will be used.
  • Page 241 Configuring Basic Features Per-Line Parameters: Two parameters listed in the above table have a per-line equivalent that you can configure. The per-line parameters are listed in the following table. Note that the per-line parameter takes precedence over the global parameter. X stands for the serial number of the account.
  • Page 242 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones If Auto LineKeys is enabled, you can automatically assign multiple DSS keys with Line type for a registered line on the phone. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the number of line keys via web user interface: Click Account->Advanced.

  • Page 243: Multiple Call Appearances

    Configuring Basic Features Multiple Call Appearances You can enable each registered line on the phone to support multiple concurrent calls. For example, you can place one call on hold, switch to another call on the same registered line, and have both calls display. You can set the maximum number of concurrent calls per line key on a phone or a per-line basis.

  • Page 244: Call Display

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameter Default Values “account.X.phone_setting.call_appearance.calls_per_linekey” takes precedence over that configured by this parameter. It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None Per-Line Parameter: “account.X.phone_setting.call_appearance.calls_per_linekey”...
  • Page 245 Configuring Basic Features For SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T27P/T27G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2 IP phones: For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones: You can customize the call information to be displayed on the IP phone as required. IP phones support five call information display methods: Number+Name, Name, Name+Number, Number or Full Contact Info (display name<sip:xxx@domain.com>).
  • Page 246 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Specify the call information display method. Parameter: phone_setting.call_info_display_method Specify the horizontal scroll speed of caller information. Parameter: phone_setting.incoming_call.horizontal_ roll_interval Configure display contact photo feature. Configure display called party information feature. Specify the call information display Web User Interface method.
  • Page 247 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default incoming call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Settings->Call Display->Display Called Party Information Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.call_info_display_method 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 Description: Specifies the call information display method when the IP phone receives an incoming call, dials an outgoing call or is during an active call.

  • Page 248: Display Method On Dialing

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Call Information Display Method. Click Confirm to accept the change. Display Method on Dialing When the IP phone is on the pre-dialing or dialing screen, the account information will be displayed on the top left corner of the LCD screen.

  • Page 249: Time And Date

    Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.caller_name_type_on_dialing 1, 2 or 3 Description: Configures the account information displayed on the top left corner of the LCD screen when the IP phone is on the pre-dialing or dialing screen. 1-Label 2-Display Name 3-User Name...
  • Page 250 DD MMM YYYY 02 Sep, 2016 WWW DD MMM Fri, 02 Sep Yealink IP phones also support customizing date format. For example, YYYY-MMM-DDD-WWW, and W,MD, etc. For more information, refer to Time and Date Settings on page 232. The following table lists available configuration methods for time and date.

  • Page 251: Ntp Time Server

    Configuring Basic Features Option Configuration Methods Configuration Files Time Format Web User Interface Phone User Interface Web User Interface Date Phone User Interface Configuration Files Date Format Web User Interface Phone User Interface Date Format (custom) Configuration Files Configuration Files Daylight Saving Time Web User Interface A time server is a computer server that reads the actual time from a reference clock and...
  • Page 252 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configure the NTP server, time zone. Parameters: local_time.ntp_server1 local_time.ntp_server2 local_time.interval local_time.time_zone local_time.time_zone_name Configure NTP by DHCP priority feature and DHCP time feature. Configure the NTP server, time zone. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p...
  • Page 253 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It is only available to offset from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Web User Interface: Settings->Time & Date->DHCP Time Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Time & Date->DHCP Time->DHCP Time local_time.ntp_server1 IP address or domain name cn.pool.ntp.org Description: Configures the IP address or the domain name of the NTP server 1.
  • Page 254 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the interval (in seconds) to update time and date from the NTP server. Example: local_time.interval = 1000 Web User Interface: Settings->Time & Date->Update Interval (15~86400s)
  • Page 255 Configuring Basic Features To configure NTP by DHCP priority feature via web user interface: Click on Settings->Time & Date. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of NTP by DHCP Priority. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the NTP server, time zone via web user interface: Click on Settings->Time &...

  • Page 256: Time And Date Settings

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Enter the desired time interval in the Update Interval (15~86400s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the NTP server and time zone via phone user interface: Press Menu->Basic->Time & Date->General->SNTP Settings.
  • Page 257 Configuring Basic Features Format Description For example, 16, 17, 18… It represents a four-digit year. Y is used more than twice (e.g., YYY, YYYY) For example, 2016, 2017, 2018… It represents a two-digit month. M/MM For example, 01, 02,…, 12 It represents the abbreviation of the month.
  • Page 258 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones =settings-datetime&q=load Configure the time and date manually. Phone User Interface Configure the time and date formats. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default local_time.manual_time_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to obtain time and date from manual settings.
  • Page 259 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the date format. 0-WWW MMM DD 1-DD-MMM-YY 2-YYYY-MM-DD 3-DD/MM/YYYY 4-MM/DD/YY 5-DD MMM YYYY 6-WWW DD MMM Note: “WWW” represents the abbreviation of the week, “DD” represents a two-digit day, “MMM” represents the first three letters of the month, “YYYY” represents a four-digit year, and “YY”...
  • Page 260 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default “W”/“WW” represents the abbreviation of the day of week, three or more three “W” letters (e.g., WWW) represent the long format of the day of week. Web User Interface:...

  • Page 261: Daylight Saving Time (Dst)

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Date Format. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the time and date manually via phone user interface: Press Menu->Basic->Time & Date->General->Manual Settings. Enter the date and time in the Date Time field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
  • Page 262 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure Daylight saving time can be configured using the following methods. Configure DST. Parameters: local_time.summer_time Central Provisioning local_time.dst_time_type <MAC>.cfg (Configuration File) local_time.start_time local_time.end_time local_time.offset_time Configure DST. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=setting...
  • Page 263 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Settings->Time & Date->Fixed Type Phone User Interface: None local_time.start_time Time 1/1/0 Description: Configures the starting time of the Daylight Saving Time (DST). Value formats are: Month/Day/Hour (for DST by Date) ...
  • Page 264 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Month/Day/Hour (for DST by Date)  Month/Week of Month/Day of Week/Hour of Day (for DST by Week)  If “local_time.dst_time_type” is set to 0 (DST by Date), use the mapping: Month: 1=January, 2=February,…, 12=December...
  • Page 265 Configuring Basic Features Enter the domain name or IP address in the Primary Server and Secondary Server field respectively. Enter the desired time interval in the Update Interval (15~86400s) field. Mark the Enabled radio box in the Daylight Saving Time field. Mark the DST by Date radio box in the Fixed Type field.
  • Page 266 AutoDST file if required. The AutoDST file allows you to add or modify time zone and DST settings for your area each year. Before customizing, you need to obtain the AutoDST file. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for DST template. You can also obtain the DST template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 267 Configuring Basic Features The display order of time zone is corresponding to the szTime order specified in the  AutoDST.xml file. If the starting time of DST is greater than the ending time, the valid time of DST is from the ...

  • Page 268: Language

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure The access URL of the AutoDST file can be specified using the configuration files. Specify the access URL of the AutoDST file. Central Provisioning <MAC>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) auto_dst.url Details of Configuration Parameter:...

  • Page 269: Loading Language Packs

    IP phone. Language packs can only be loaded using configuration files. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for language packs. You can also obtain the language packs online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 270 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Associated Language Pack Available Language German 004.GUI.German.lang Italian 005.GUI.Italian.lang Polish 006.GUI.Polish.lang Portuguese 007.GUI.Portuguese.lang Spanish 008.GUI.Spanish.lang Turkish 009.GUI.Turkish.lang Russian 010.GUI.Russian.lang When adding a new language pack for the phone user interface, the language pack must be formatted as “X.GUI.name.lang”...
  • Page 271 Configuring Basic Features Save the language file and place it to the provisioning server (e.g., 192.168.10.25). Specify the access URL of the phone user interface language pack in the configuration files. If you want to add a new custom language (e.g., Guilan) to your IP phone (e.g., SIP-T46G), prepare the language file named as “011.GUI.Guilan.lang”...
  • Page 272 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default http://localhost/all or Y.GUI.nam gui_lang.delete http://localhost/ Blank e.lang Description: Deletes the specified or all custom LCD language packs of the phone user interface. Example: Delete all custom language packs of the phone user interface: gui_lang.delete = http://localhost/all...
  • Page 273 Configuring Basic Features When adding a new language pack for the web user interface, the language pack must be formatted as “Y.name.js” (Y starts from 12, “name” is replaced with the language name). If the language name is the same as the existing one, the existing language file will be overridden by the new uploaded one.
  • Page 274 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones The following shows a portion of the note language pack “1.English_note.xml” for the web user interface (take SIP-T46G IP phones for example): Save the language file and place it to the provisioning server (e.g., 192.168.10.25).
  • Page 275 Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default wui_lang.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the custom language pack for the web user interface. Example: wui_lang.url = http://192.168.10.25/1.English.js During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the HTTP provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the language pack “1.English.js”.

  • Page 276: Specifying The Language To Use

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None http://localhost/all or wui_lang.delete Blank Y.name.js http://localhost/ Description: Delete the specified or all custom web language packs and note language packs of the web user interface. Example: Delete all custom language packs of the web user interface: wui_lang.delete = http://localhost/all...
  • Page 277 If you want to use the custom language (e.g., Guilan) for the IP phone, configure the parameter “static.lang.gui = Guilan”. Note: For SIP-T42G/T41P/T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2 IP phones, they do not support Chinese by default. For more information, contact Yealink FAE. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Language...

  • Page 278: Input Method

    Keypad input method customization allows users to customize the existing input method on IP phones. You can first customize the Yealink-supplied keypad input method file “ime.txt”, “Russian_ime.txt” or “Hebrew_ime.txt”, and then download it to the IP phone. The changes in the “Russian_ime.txt”...
  • Page 279 Configuring Basic Features You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for keypad input method file. You can also obtain the keypad input method file online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage. For more information on obtaining the keypad input method file, refer to Obtaining Boot Files/Configuration Files/Resource Files on page 131.
  • Page 280 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones The following shows a portion of the keypad input method file “Russian_ime.txt”: To customize a keypad input method file: Open the desired keypad input method file (e.g., ime.txt) using an ASCII editor.
  • Page 281 Configuring Basic Features Save the keypad input method file and place it to the provisioning server (e.g., 192.168.10.25). Specify the access URL of the custom keypad input method file in the configuration files. When adding new characters for the existing input method, ensure that the added characters are Note supported by IP phones.

  • Page 282: Specifying The Default Input Method

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None http://localhost/all or gui_input_method.delete Blank Name.txt http://localhost/ Description: Delete the specified or all custom keypad input method files of the phone user interface.

  • Page 283: Logo Customization

    Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default Abc, 2aB, 123, abc, ABC or directory.edit_default_input_method Hebrew Description: Configures the default input method when the user edits contacts in the Local Directory, LDAP, Remote Phone Book or Blacklist. Example: directory.edit_default_input_method = abc Note: The input method “Hebrew”...

  • Page 284: Customizing A Logo Template File

    The common picture format can be *.gif/*.jpg/*.png/*.bmp. Yealink IP phones only support the *.dob format logo files. Yealink provides PictureExDemo tool to convert *.gif/*.jpg/*.png/*.bmp format to *.dob format. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for the PictureExDemo tool.

  • Page 285: Configuring The Logo Shown On The Idle Screen

    Configuring Basic Features To customize a dob formatted logo file using the PictureExDemo tool: Double click the PictureExDemo.exe. Click Add button to open a *.gif/*.jpg/*.png/*.bmp file. You can repeat the second step to add multiple original picture files. Click the Convert button. Then you can find the DOB logo files in the adv directory.
  • Page 286 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Specify the access URL of the custom logo file. Parameter: lcd_logo.url Delete all custom logo files. Parameter: lcd_logo.delete Configure the logo shown on the idle screen. Upload the custom logo file.
  • Page 287 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: lcd_logo.url = http://192.168.10.25/logo.dob During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the custom logo file “logo.dob”. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.lcd_logo.mode” is set to 2 (Custom logo).

  • Page 288: Softkey Layout

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Click Upload to upload the file. Click Confirm to accept the change. Softkey Layout Softkey layout is used to customize the soft keys at the bottom of the LCD screen to best meet users’...
  • Page 289 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Softkey layout can be configured using the following methods. Configure the softkey layout. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx Parameter: >.cfg (Configuration File) phone_setting.custom_softkey_enable Configure the softkey layout. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=settings-s oftkey&q=load Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default...

  • Page 290: Customizing Softkey Layout Template File

    The softkey layout template allows you to customize soft key layout for different call states. The call states include CallFailed, CallIn, Connecting, Dialing (not applicable to SIP-T48G/S), RingBack and Talking. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for softkey layout template. You can also obtain the softkey layout template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage. For more...
  • Page 291 Configuring Basic Features Call State Default Soft Keys Optional Soft Keys Empty End Call Transfer Empty Empty SemiAttendTrans Empty Switch End Call Empty History Send Switch Line Dialing (not applicable to SIP-T48G/S IP phones) Delete Favorite (Directory) End Call GPickup DPickup Retrieve Empty...
  • Page 292 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Call State Default Soft Keys Optional Soft Keys Empty Transfer Switch Resume Hold Answer NewCall Reject End Call Security Empty Empty Switch Empty Answer Held Empty Reject End Call NewCall Security...
  • Page 293 Configuring Basic Features To customize a softkey layout template: Open the template file using an ASCII editor. For each soft key that you want to enable, move the string in the disabled soft key list to enabled soft key list in the file. For each soft key that you want to disabled, just move the string in the enabled soft key list to disabled soft key list.
  • Page 294 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure Specify the access URL of the softkey layout template using the configuration files. Specify the access URL of the softkey layout template. Parameters: custom_softkey_call_failed.url Central Provisioning custom_softkey_call_in.url <y0000000000xx>.cfg (Configuration File) custom_softkey_connecting.url...
  • Page 295 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None custom_softkey_connecting.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the custom file for the soft key presented on the LCD screen when in the Connecting (callout) state. Example: custom_softkey_connecting.url = http://192.168.1.20/XMLfiles/Connecting.xml During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server...

  • Page 296: Key As Send

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default when in the RingBack state. Example: custom_softkey_ring_back.url = http://192.168.1.20/XMLfiles/RingBack.xml During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.1.20”, and downloads the RingBack state file from the “XMLfiles” directory.
  • Page 297 Configuring Basic Features Configure a send tone. Parameter: features.send_key_tone Configure a key tone. Parameter: features.key_tone Configure send pound key. Parameter: features.send_pound_key Configure a send key. Configure send pound key. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load Web User Interface Configure a send tone or key tone. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-audio&q=load...
  • Page 298 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Others->General->Key As Send features.key_tone 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to play a key tone when a user presses any key on your phone keypad.
  • Page 299 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Features->General Information->Send Pound Key Phone User Interface: None To configure a send key via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Key As Send. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 300: Dial Plan

    “match” (specify and recognize) strings of text, such as particular characters, words, or patterns of characters. Yealink IP phones support two methods to help creating a dial plan: Dial Plan using XML...

  • Page 301: Replace Rule

    Configuring Basic Features brackets. Example: “[5-7]” would match the number “5”, ”6” or ”7”. The comma “,” can be used as a separator within the bracket. Example: “[2,5,8]” would match the number ”2”, “5” or “8”. The square bracket "[]" can be used as a placeholder for a single character which matches any of a set of characters.
  • Page 302 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones =settings-dialplan&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default dialplan.replace.prefix.X String within 32 characters Blank (X ranges from 1 to 100) Description: Configures the entered number to be replaced. Example: dialplan.replace.prefix.1 = 1 Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “dialplan.digitmap.enable”...
  • Page 303 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Permitted Values: 0 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) 0 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/S) 0 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) 0 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) 0 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) Example: dialplan.replace.line_id.1 = 1,2 Note: Multiple line IDs are separated by commas. It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 304 Customizing Replace Rule Template File The replace rule template helps with the creation of multiple replace rules. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for replace rule template. You can also obtain the replace rule template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage. For more...
  • Page 305 Configuring Basic Features LineID="" specifies the desired line(s) for this rule. When you leave it blank or enter 0, this replace rule will apply to all lines. If you want to change the replace rule, specify the values within double quotes. Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server.

  • Page 306: Dial Now

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Dial Now Dial now is a string used to match numbers entered by the user. When entered numbers match the predefined dial now rule, the IP phone will automatically dial out the numbers without pressing the send key.
  • Page 307 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the dial now rule (the string used to match the numbers entered by the user). When entered numbers match the predefined dial now rule, the IP phone will automatically dial out the numbers without pressing the send key. Example: dialplan.dialnow.rule.1 = 123 Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “dialplan.digitmap.enable”...
  • Page 308 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the delay time (in seconds) for the dial now rule. When entered numbers match the predefined dial now rule, the IP phone will automatically dial out the entered number after the designated delay time.
  • Page 309 URL in the configuration files. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for dial now template. You can also obtain the dial now template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage. For more...
  • Page 310 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Phone Model Values Description 0 stands for all lines SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G 1~6 stand for line1~line6 0 stands for all lines SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G 1~3 stand for line1~line3 0 stands for all lines SIP-T21(P) E2 1~2 stand for line1~line2 At most 100 rules can be added to the IP phone.

  • Page 311: Area Code

    Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default URL within 511 characters dialplan_dialnow.url Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the dial now rule template file. Example: dialplan_dialnow.url = http://192.168.10.25/dialnow.xml During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the dial now rule file “dialnow.xml”.
  • Page 312 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =settings-areacode&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default dialplan.area_code.code String within 16 characters Blank Description: Configures the area code to be added before the entered numbers when dialing out.
  • Page 313 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Settings->Dial Plan->Area Code->Max Length (1-15) Phone User Interface: None Blank (for dialplan.area_code.line_id Refer to the following content all lines) Description: Configures the desired line to apply the area code rule. The digit 0 stands for all lines. If it is left blank, the area code rule will apply to all lines on the IP phone.

  • Page 314: Block Out

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones If you leave this field blank or enter 0, the area code rule will apply to all accounts on the IP phone. Click Confirm to accept the change. Block Out Block out rule prevents users from dialing out specific numbers. When entered numbers match the predefined block out rule, the LCD screen prompts “Forbidden Number”.
  • Page 315 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the block out numbers. Example: dialplan.block_out.number.1 = 4321 When you dial the number “4321” on your phone, the dialing will fail and the LCD screen will prompt "Forbidden Number". Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “dialplan.digitmap.enable” and “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable”...

  • Page 316: Dial Plan Using Digit Map String Rules

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Enter the desired line ID in the Account field or leave it blank. If you leave this field blank or enter 0, the block out rule will apply to all accounts on the IP phone.
  • Page 317 Configuring Basic Features The dot “.” can be used as a placeholder or multiple placeholders, including zero, of occurrences of the preceding construct. Examples: “123.T” would match “123”, “1233”, “12333”, “123333”, etc. “x.T” would match an arbitrary number. “[x*#+].T” would match an arbitrary character. Note: If the string ends with a dot (e.g., 123.), a match will occur immediately after inputting the characters before the dot (e., 123) since the dot allows for zero occurrences of the preceding construct.
  • Page 318 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure Digit map can be created using the configuration files. Configure digit map on a phone basis. Parameters: dialplan.digitmap.enable dialplan.digitmap.string dialplan.digitmap.interdigit_long_timer dialplan.digitmap.interdigit_short_timer <y0000000000xx>.c dialplan.digitmap.no_match_action dialplan.digitmap.active.on_hook_dialing dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.on_hook_dial dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.directory_dial dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.forward dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.press_send Configure digit map on a per-line basis.
  • Page 319 Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values dialplan.digitmap.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the digit map feature for the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: The value configured by the parameter “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable” takes precedence over that configured by this parameter. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 320 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Integer dialplan.digitmap.interdigit_long_timer from 0 to Description: Configures the time (in seconds) for the IP phone to wait before dialing an entered number if it matches part of any string of the digit map.
  • Page 321 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Valid values are: Single configuration (configure a specific value for the timer letter “T” for all strings  with “T” of the digit map) Example: dialplan.digitmap.interdigit_short_timer = 5 If the value of the parameter “dialplan.digitmap.string” is set to <[2-9]x:86>3.T|0T, the IP phone will wait 5 seconds before matching the entered digits to this dial plan and placing the call.
  • Page 322 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). The value configured by the parameter “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.no_match_action” takes precedence over that configured by this parameter. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dialplan.digitmap.active.on_hook_dialing...
  • Page 323 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Phone User Interface: None dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.directory_dial 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the digit map to be applied to the numbers dialed from the directory. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “dialplan.digitmap.enable” or “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable”...
  • Page 324 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Description: Enables or disables the entered number to match the predefined string of the digit map after pressing a send key. It is only applicable to the off-hook dialing.
  • Page 325 Configuring Basic Features Per-Line Parameters: The parameters listed in the above table have a per-line equivalent that you can configure. All of the per-line parameters are listed in the following table. Note that the per-line parameters take precedence over the global parameters. For example, “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable” takes precedence over “dialplan.digitmap.enable”. X stands for the serial number of the account.
  • Page 326 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Per-Line Parameters Global Parameters account.X.dialplan.digitmap.active.on_hook_dialing dialplan.digitmap.active.on_hook_dialing account.X.dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.on_hook_dial dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.on_hook_dial account.X.dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.directory_dial dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.directory_dial account.X.dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.forward dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.forward account.X.dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.press_send dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.press_send...

  • Page 327: Emergency Dialplan

    Configuring Basic Features Emergency Dialplan Yealink IP phones support dialing emergency telephone numbers when the phone is locked (refer to Phone Lock). Due to the fact that the IP phone must have a registered account or a configured SIP server, it may not meet the need of dialing emergency telephone number at any time.
  • Page 328 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure Emergency dialplan can be configured using the configuration files. Configure the emergency dialplan. Parameters: dialplan.emergency.asserted_id_source Central dialplan.emergency.custom_asserted_id Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.c dialplan.emergency.server.X.address (Configuration dialplan.emergency.server.X.port File) dialplan.emergency.server.X.transport_type dialplan.emergency.X.value dialplan.emergency.X.server_priority Details of Configuration Parameters:...
  • Page 329 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the custom outbound identity when placing an emergency call. If using a TEL URI, for example, tel:+16045558000. The full URI is included in the P-Asserted-Identity (PAI) header (e.g., <tel:+16045558000>). If using a SIP URI, for example, sip:1234567890123@abc.com. The full URI is included in the P-Asserted-Identity (PAI) header and the address will be replaced by the emergency server (e.g., <sip:1234567890123@emergency.com>).
  • Page 330 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default dialplan.emergency.server.X.transport_type 0, 1, 2 or 3 (X ranges from 1 to 3) Description: Configures the transport method the IP phone uses to communicate with the emergency server X.

  • Page 331: Hotline

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default the emergency server with higher priority does not respond correctly to the INVITE, then the phone tries to make the call using the emergency server with lower priority, and so forth. The IP phone tries to send the INVITE request to each emergency server for three times. Example: dialplan.emergency.1.server_priority = 2, 1, 3 It means the IP phone sends the INVITE request to the emergency server 2 first.
  • Page 332 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configure the hotline number. Specify the time the IP phone waits before automatically dialing out the hotline number. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load Configure the hotline number. Specify the time the IP phone waits...

  • Page 333: Off Hook Hot Line Dialing

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: Line key is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Hotline Delay(0~10s) Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Others->Hot Line->Hotline Delay To configure hotline via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Enter the hotline number in the Hotline Number field. Enter the delay time in the Hotline Delay(0~10s) field.
  • Page 334 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones from a SIP server. Off hook hot line dialing feature limits the call-out permission of this account and disables the Note hotline feature. For example, when the phone goes off hook using the account with this feature enabled, the configured hotline number will not be dialed out automatically.

  • Page 335: Directory List

    The LDAP list is hidden by default. To configure the LDAP list, you should enable LDAP feature first. For more information, refer to Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) on page 553. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for directory template. You can also obtain the...
  • Page 336 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones directory template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage. For more information on obtaining the directory template, refer to Obtaining Boot Files/Configuration Files/Resource Files on page 131. The following table lists meaning of each variable in the directory template file:...
  • Page 337 Configuring Basic Features For example, configure the local directory list, edit the values within double quotes in the following strings: <item id_name="localdirectory" display_name="Local Directory" priority="1" enable="1" dev="common"/> Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server (e.g., 192.168.1.20). Specify the access URL of the custom directory template file in the configuration files (e.g., static.directory_setting.url = http://192.168.1.20/favorite_setting.xml).

  • Page 338: Search Source List In Dialing

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default None To configure the directory via web user interface: Click on Directory->Setting. In the Directory block, select the desired list from the Disabled column and then click The selected list appears in the Enabled column.

  • Page 339: Customizing A Super Search Template File

    For more information, refer to Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) on page 553. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for super search template. You can also obtain the super search template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage. For more information on obtaining the super search template, refer to...
  • Page 340 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Element Attribute Description T21 T23 T40 T27 T27G T29 T41 T42 The applicable phone models T42S T41S T46 T46S T48 T48S; of the directory list. T29 T46 T46S T48 T48S. Note: Do not edit this field.
  • Page 341 Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the access URL of the super search template file. Example: super_search.url = http://192.168.1.20/super_search.xml During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.1.20”, and downloads the super search template file “super_search.xml”. Web User Interface: Directory->Setting->Search Source List In Dialing Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 342: Call Log

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Call Log IP phones record and maintain phone events to a call log, also known as a call list. The call log contains call information such as remote party identification, time and date of the call, and call duration.

  • Page 343: Backing Up The Call Logs

    Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Yealink IP phones support storing all call logs to a call log file named <MAC>-calllog.xml. You can back up this file to the server, avoiding data loss. Once the call logs update, the IP phone will automatically upload this file to the provisioning server or a specific server.
  • Page 344 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones <MAC>-calllog.xml file according to its MAC address from the server during auto provisioning. The call log file is named after the MAC address of the IP phone. MAC address, a unique 12-digit serial number assigned to each phone, can be obtained from the bar code on the back of the IP phone.

  • Page 345: Call List Show Number

    Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values None static.auto_provision.local_calllog.backup.path String Blank Description: Configures a path or URL for the IP phone to upload/download the <MAC>-calllog.xml file. If it is left blank, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server URL, and uploads/downloads the contact file “<MAC>-calllog.xml”.
  • Page 346 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure Call list show number can be configured using the following methods. Configure call list show number. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) features.call_log_show_num Configure call list show number. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p...

  • Page 347: Missed Call Log

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Call List Show Number. Click Confirm to accept the change. Missed Call Log Missed call log allows the IP phone to display the number of missed calls with an indicator icon on the idle screen, and to log missed calls in the Missed Calls list when the IP phone misses calls.
  • Page 348 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configure missed call log feature. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=acco unt-basic&q=load&acc=0 Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default account.X.missed_calllog 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to indicate and record missed calls for SIP account X.

  • Page 349: Local Directory

    Contacts and groups can be added either one by one or in batch using a local contact file. Yealink IP phones support both *.xml and *.csv format contact files, but only support *.xml format download for local contact file.
  • Page 350 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones The following table lists meaning of each variable in the local contact template file: Element Values Description Group list’s root element. root_group Group’s root element. group All Contacts An element of group. Group...
  • Page 351 Configuring Basic Features Element Values Description Format of the value: Contact avatar. Resource:avatar name (the Note: It is only applicable to built-in avatar) default_photo SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G Config:avatar name (the IP phones. custom avatar) The following table lists valid values of line for each phone model. Phone Model Values Description...
  • Page 352 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configuration Parameters The following table lists the configuration parameters used when customizing a local contact file: Parameters Permitted Values Default local_contact.data.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the local contact file (*.xml).
  • Page 353 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default The contact icon file should be uploaded to the provisioning server in advance. Example: local_contact.icon_image.url = tftp://192.168.10.25/Photo.jpg Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None local_contact.image.url URL within 511 characters...
  • Page 354 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None local_contact.icon.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of a TAR contact icon file. The format of the contact icon must be *.png, *.jpg, *.bmp.
  • Page 355 Configuring Basic Features For example: <group display_name="Friend" ring="Splash.wav"/> <contact display_name="Lily" office_number="1020" mobile_number="1021" other_number="1112" line="1,2" ring="Ring1.wav" group_id_name="Friend"/> Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server. Specify the access URL of the custom local contact template in the configuration files. For example: local_contact.data.url = tftp://192.168.10.25/contact.xml During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server...
  • Page 356 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Specify the values within double quotes. For example: <group display_name="Friend" ring="Splash.wav"/> <contact display_name="Lily" office_number="1020" mobile_number="1021" other_number="1112" line="1,2" ring="Ring1.wav" group_id_name="Friend" default_photo="Resource:icon_family_b.png"/> Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server.
  • Page 357 Configuring Basic Features Create a folder (e.g., photo) on the local system (e.g., C:\Program Files) and place the file that will be compressed (e.g., cutom1.jpg, cutom2.png) to this folder. Start the 7-Zip file manager application (7zFM.exe). Locate the photo folder from the local system (C:\Program Files\photo\). Select the desired photos that will be compressed.
  • Page 358 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones A photo.tar file is generated in the directory C:\Program Files\photo. Place this file to the provisioning server (e.g., 192.168.10.25). Customizing a Local Contact File To customize a local contact file: Open the template file using an ASCII editor.
  • Page 359 Configuring Basic Features (“cutom1.jpg” and “cutom2.png”). Method 2: local_contact.data.url = tftp://192.168.10.25/contact.xml local_contact.image.url = tftp://192.168.10.25/photo.tar For more information on generating a contact avatar file “photo.tar”, refer to Preparing the Tar Formatted File on page 332. During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the local contact file “contact.xml”...
  • Page 360 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones formatted file (photo1.tar). The custom icons: “cutom1.jpg” and “cutom2.png”. They are compressed as a tar  formatted file (photo2.tar). For more information on generating a tar formatted file, refer to Preparing the Tar Formatted File on page 332.
  • Page 361 Configuring Basic Features There are two methods to specify custom avatar and icon for contacts: Method 1: local_contact.photo.url = tftp://192.168.10.25/cutom1.jpg local_contact.photo.url = tftp://192.168.10.25/cutom2.png local_contact.data.url = tftp://192.168.10.25/contact.xml local_contact.icon_image.url = tftp://192.168.10.25/cutom1.jpg local_contact.icon_image.url = tftp://192.168.10.25/cutom2.png During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the avatars (cutom1.jpg and cutom2.png), icons (cutom1.jpg and cutom2.png) and the contact file “contact.xml”.

  • Page 362: Configuring Local Directory

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones The following shows the custom avatars downloaded from the provisioning server: The following shows the custom icons downloaded from the provisioning server: Procedure Local directory be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 363 Configuring Basic Features To import or export the local contact file. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =contactsbasic&q=load&num=1&g roup= Add a new group and a contact to Phone User Interface the local directory. Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default local_contact.data.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description:...
  • Page 364 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired ring tone from the pull-down list of Ring. Click Add to add the group. To add a contact to the local directory via web user interface: Click on Directory->Local Directory.
  • Page 365 Configuring Basic Features If Auto is selected, the IP phone will use the default account when placing calls to the contact from the local directory. Click Add to add the contact. To add a group to the local directory via phone user interface: Press Menu->Directory->Local Directory.
  • Page 366 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Click Browse to locate a contact list file (the file format must be *.xml) from your local system. Click Import XML to import the contact list. The web user interface prompts "The original contact will be covered, continue?".

  • Page 367: Backing Up The Local Contacts

    Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Yealink IP phones support storing all local contacts to a contact file named <MAC>-contact.xml. You can back up this file to the server, avoiding data loss. Once the contacts update, the IP phone will automatically upload this file to the provisioning server or a specific server.
  • Page 368 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones download the <MAC>-contact.xml file according to its MAC address from the server during auto provisioning. The contact file is named after the MAC address of the IP phone. MAC address, a unique 12-digit serial number assigned to each phone, can be obtained from the bar code on the back of the IP phone.

  • Page 369: Live Dialpad

    Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Phone User Interface: None static.auto_provision.local_contact.backup.path String Blank Description: Configures a path or URL for the IP phone to upload/download the <MAC>-contact.xml file. If it is left blank, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server URL, and uploads/downloads the contact file “<MAC>-contact.xml”.
  • Page 370 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting.predial_autodial 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the live dialpad feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will automatically dial out the entered phone number on the dialing screen without pressing a send key.

  • Page 371: Speed Dial

    Configuring Basic Features Enter the desired delay time in the Inter Digit Time(1~14s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Speed Dial Speed dial allows users to speed up dialing the numbers frequently used or hard to remember using dedicated DSS keys. Procedure Speed dial key can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 372 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default linekey.X.type/ Refer to the programablekey.X.type/ following content expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Description: Configures a DSS key as a speed dial key on the IP phone. The digit 13 stands for the key type Speed Dial.
  • Page 373 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default The default value of the line key 1-12 is 15, and the default value of the line key 13-15 is 0. For SIP-T41P/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-15 is 0. For SIP-T27P/G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-21 is 0.
  • Page 374 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu).
  • Page 375 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For ext keys: For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones: When Y= 1 to 40, the default value is 0 (NA). For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones: When Y= 1, 21, the default value is 37 (Switch).
  • Page 376 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Permitted Values: 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/S) 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2)
  • Page 377 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default For ext keys: For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40. For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured). Example: linekey.1.value = 1008 Web User Interface:...

  • Page 378: Call Waiting

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones To configure a speed dial key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key (or Programable Key). In the desired DSS key field, select Speed Dial from the pull-down list of Type.
  • Page 379 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Call waiting and call waiting tone can be configured using the following methods. Configure call waiting and call waiting tone. Parameters: Central Provisioning call_waiting.enable <y0000000000xx>.cfg (Configuration File) call_waiting.tone call_waiting.on_code call_waiting.off_code Configure call waiting. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load Web User Interface Configure call waiting tone.
  • Page 380 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Features->Call Waiting->Call Waiting call_waiting.tone 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to play the call waiting tone when the IP phone receives an incoming call during a call.
  • Page 381 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Call Waiting Off Code Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Call Waiting->Off Code To configure call waiting via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Call Waiting. (Optional.) Enter the call waiting on code in the Call Waiting On Code field.

  • Page 382: Auto Redial

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Auto Redial Auto redial allows IP phones to redial a busy number after the first attempt. Both the number of attempts and waiting time between redials are configurable.
  • Page 383 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the interval (in seconds) for the IP phone to wait between redials. The IP phone redials the dialed number at regular intervals till the callee answers the call. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “auto_redial.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Auto Redial Interval (1~300s) Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 384: Auto Answer

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones To configure auto redial via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Others->Auto Redial. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Auto Redial field. Enter the waiting time (in seconds) in the Redial Interval field.
  • Page 385 Configuring Basic Features Configure auto answer tone. Parameter: features.auto_answer_tone.enable Configure auto answer mute. Parameter: features.mute.autoanswer_mute.enable Configure the IP phone whether to handle the incoming call arriving when the phone is in another call or is dialing like a normal call. Parameter: features.auto_answer.first_call_only Configure auto answer.
  • Page 386 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Note: The IP phone cannot automatically answer the incoming call during a call or while dialing even if auto answer is enabled.
  • Page 387 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None features.auto_answer_tone.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone to play a warning tone when an incoming call is automatically answered. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: For the call coming from a SIP account, it works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.auto_answer”...
  • Page 388 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Auto Answer. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a period of delay time for auto answer via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information.

  • Page 389: Ip Direct Auto Answer

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Enable Auto Answer Tone. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure auto answer via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Auto Answer. Select the desired line. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Auto Answer field.
  • Page 390 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.ip_call.auto_answer.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the auto answer feature for IP call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone can automatically answer an IP call.

  • Page 391: Allow Ip Call

    Configuring Basic Features Allow IP Call Allow IP Call feature allows IP phones to receive or place an IP address call. You can neither receive nor place an IP address call if allow IP call feature is disabled. Procedure Allow IP call can be configured using the following methods. Configure allow IP call.

  • Page 392: Accept Sip Trust Server Only

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Allow IP Call. Click Confirm to accept the change. Accept SIP Trust Server Only Accept SIP trust server only enables the IP phones to only accept the SIP message from your SIP server and outbound proxy server.
  • Page 393 Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default sip.trust_ctrl 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to only accept the SIP message from the SIP server and outbound proxy server. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Accept SIP Trust Server Only Phone User Interface: None...

  • Page 394: Call Completion

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Call Completion Call completion allows users to monitor the busy party and establish a call when the busy party becomes available to receive a call. Two factors commonly prevent a call from connecting...
  • Page 395 NOTIFY sip:10111@10.10.20.32:5060 SIP/2.0 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.10.20.31:5060;branch=z9hG4bK3431394016 From: <sip:1000@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=1558968605 To: "10111" <sip:10111@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=140677866 Call-ID: 0_2584152566@10.10.20.32 CSeq: 5 NOTIFY Contact: <sip:1000@10.10.20.31:5060> Content-Type: application/dialog-info+xml Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Subscription-State: active;expires=48 Event: dialog Content-Length: <?xml version="1.0"?> <dialog-info xmlns="urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:dialog-info" version="4" state="partial" entity="sip:1000@10.2.1.48:5060"> <dialog id="65644"> <state>terminated</state>...
  • Page 396 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure Call completion can be configured using the following methods. Configure call completion. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) features.call_completion_enable Configure call completion. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load Configure call completion.

  • Page 397: Anonymous Call

    Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.3.20.14:5060;branch=z9hG4bK3074920774 From: "Anonymous" <sip:anonymous@anonymous.invalid>;tag=131654239 To: <sip:1006@10.2.1.48:5060> Call-ID: 0_288363101@10.3.20.14 CSeq: 1 INVITE Contact: <sip:1009@10.3.20.14:5060> Content-Type: application/sdp Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync...
  • Page 398 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones P-Preferred-Identity: <sip:1009@10.2.1.48> Privacy: id Content-Length: 302 The anonymous call on code and anonymous call off code configured on IP phones are used to activate/deactivate the server-side anonymous call feature. They may vary on different servers.
  • Page 399 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Web User Interface: Account->Basic->Local Anonymous Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Anonymous->Line X->Local Anonymous account.X.send_anonymous_code 0 or 1 Description: Configures the IP phone to send anonymous on/off code to activate/deactivate the server-side anonymous call feature for account X.
  • Page 400 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Example: account.1.anonymous_call_oncode = *72 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.send_anonymous_code”...

  • Page 401: Anonymous Call Rejection

    Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.10.20.32:5060;branch=z9hG4bK2816884590 From: "Anonymous" <sip:anonymous@anonymous.invalid>;tag=2625078618 To: <sip:1058@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=2781829106 Call-ID: 4_510565349@10.10.20.32 CSeq: 1 INVITE Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Allow-Events: talk, hold, conference, refer, check-sync Content-Length: 0...
  • Page 402 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones The anonymous call rejection on code and anonymous call rejection off code configured on IP phones are used to activate/deactivate the server-side anonymous call rejection feature. They may vary on different servers. Send Anonymous Rejection Code feature allows IP phones to send anonymous call rejection on/off code to the server.
  • Page 403 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Account->Basic->Local Anonymous Rejection Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Anonymous->Line X->Anony Rejection account.X.send_anonymous_rejection_code 0 or 1 Description: Configures the IP phone to send anonymous rejection on/off code to activate/deactivate the server-side anonymous call rejection feature for account X. 0-Off Code 1-On Code If it is set to 0 (Off Code), the IP phone will send anonymous rejection off code to the server...
  • Page 404 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: account.1.anonymous_reject_oncode = *74 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.send_anonymous_rejection_code” is set to 1 (On Code). Web User Interface: Account->Basic->Send Anonymous Rejection Code->On Code Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Anonymous->Line X->On Code...

  • Page 405: Do Not Disturb (Dnd)

    Configuring Basic Features (Optional.) Enter the send anonymous rejection off code in the Off Code field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure anonymous call rejection via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Anonymous. Select the desired line and then press the Enter soft key. Press to scroll to the Anonymous Rejection field.

  • Page 406: Call Forward On

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones IP phone’s registrations, the other registrations are not affected. For more information on call forward, refer to Call Forward on page 416. The DND on code and DND off code configured on IP phones are used to activate/deactivate the server-side DND feature.
  • Page 407 Configuring Basic Features Configure the DND mode. Parameter: features.dnd_mode Configure DND in the phone mode. Parameters: features.dnd.enable features.dnd.on_code features.dnd.off_code Specify the authorized numbers when DND is activated. Parameters: features.dnd.emergency_enable features.dnd.emergency_authorized_n umber Specify the return code and the reason of the SIP response message when DND is activated.
  • Page 408 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Specify the authorized numbers when DND is activated. Specify the return code and the reason of the SIP response message when DND is activated. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=f eatures-general&q=load Assign a DND key.
  • Page 409 Configuring Basic Features If it is set to 1 (Custom), you can configure DND feature for each or all accounts. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. It works only if the value of the parameter “features.dnd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Features->Forward&DND->DND->Mode Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 410 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones String within 32 features.dnd.off_code Blank characters Description: Configures the DND off code to deactivate the server-side DND feature. The IP phone will send the DND off code to the server when you deactivate DND feature on the IP phone.
  • Page 411 Configuring Basic Features Description: Configures the DND on code to activate the server-side DND feature for account X. The IP phone will send the DND on code to the server when you activate DND feature for account X on the IP phone. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 412 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Menu->Features->DND->AccountX->Off Code features.dnd.emergency_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to receive incoming calls from authorized numbers when DND feature is enabled. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: The authorized numbers are configured by the parameter “features.dnd.emergency_authorized_number”.
  • Page 413 Configuring Basic Features 603-Decline If it is set to 486 (Busy Here), the caller’s phone LCD screen will display the reason “Busy Here” when the callee enables DND. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.dnd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Return Code When DND Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 414 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys: X=1-10, 12-14 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S) X=1-10, 13 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G) X=1-14 (for SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G) X=1-10, 14 (for SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2)
  • Page 415 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 51 (Switch Account Up). When X=8, the default value is 52 (Switch Account Down). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=10, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 416 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default For SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND).
  • Page 417 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default linekey.X.label/ String within 99 programablekey.X.label/ Blank characters expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Description: (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P/T27G)
  • Page 418 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones To configure DND feature via web user interface: Click on Features->Forward&DND. In the DND block, mark the desired radio box in the Mode field. If you mark the Phone radio box: Mark the desired radio box in the DND Status field.
  • Page 419 Configuring Basic Features (Optional.) Enter the DND off code in the Off Code field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To specify the authorized numbers when DND is activated via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of DND Emergency. Enter the desired value in the DND Authorized Numbers field.
  • Page 420 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Multiple numbers are separated by commas. Click Confirm to accept the change. To specify the return code and the reason when DND is activated via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information.

  • Page 421: Busy Tone Delay

    Configuring Basic Features Press , or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select DND from the Key Type field. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
  • Page 422 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.busy_tone_delay 0, 3 or 5 Description: Configures the duration time (in seconds) for the busy tone. When one party releases the call, a busy tone is audible to the other party indicating that the call connection breaks.

  • Page 423: Return Code When Refuse

    Configuring Basic Features Return Code When Refuse Return code when refuse defines the return code and reason of the SIP response message for the refused call. The caller’s phone LCD screen displays the reason according to the received return code. Available return codes and reasons are: 404 (Not Found) ...

  • Page 424: Early Media

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default Description: Configures a return code and reason of SIP response messages when the IP phone rejects an incoming call. A specific reason is displayed on the caller’s phone LCD screen.

  • Page 425: 180 Ring Workaround

    Configuring Basic Features 180 Ring Workaround 180 ring workaround defines whether to deal with the 180 message received after the 183 message. When the caller receives a 183 message, it suppresses any local ringback tone and begins to play the media received. 180 ring workaround allows IP phones to resume and play the local ringback tone upon a subsequent 180 message received.

  • Page 426: Use Outbound Proxy In Dialog

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones To configure 180 ring workaround via web user interface: 1. Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of 180 Ring Workaround. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 427 Configuring Basic Features http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default sip.use_out_bound_in_dialog 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to send all SIP requests to the outbound proxy server forcibly in a dialog. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), only the new SIP request messages from the IP phone will be sent to the outbound proxy server in a dialog.

  • Page 428: Sip Session Timer

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Use Outbound Proxy In Dialog. Click Confirm to accept the change. SIP Session Timer SIP session timers T1, T2 and T4 are SIP transaction layer timers defined in 3261.
  • Page 429 Configuring Basic Features Procedure SIP session timer can be configured using the following methods. Configure SIP session timer. Parameters: Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg sip.timer_t1 (Configuration File) sip.timer_t2 sip.timer_t4 Configure SIP session timer. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =settings-sip&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default...

  • Page 430: Session Timer

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the SIP session timer of T4 (in seconds). T4 represents the maximum duration a message will remain in the network. Web User Interface: Settings->SIP->SIP Session Timer T4 (2.5~60s)
  • Page 431 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.10.20.32:5060;branch=z9hG4bK2104991394 From: "10111" <sip:10111@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=2170397024 To: <sip:1058@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=200382096 Call-ID: 4_1556494084@10.10.20.32 CSeq: 2 UPDATE Contact: <sip:10111@10.10.20.32:5060> Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Session-Expires: 90;refresher=uac Supported: timer Content-Length: 0 Procedure Session timer can be configured using the following methods. Configure session timer.
  • Page 432 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default during a call. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 433 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the function of the endpoint who initiates the SIP request for account X. 0-UAC 1-UAS X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2)

  • Page 434: Call Hold

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired refresher from the pull-down list of Session Refresher. Click Confirm to accept the change. Call Hold Call hold provides a service of placing an active call on hold. The purpose of call hold is to pause activity on the existing call so that you can use the phone for another task (e.g., to place or...
  • Page 435 Configuring Basic Features Specify whether RFC 2543 (c=0.0.0.0) outgoing hold signaling is used. Parameter: sip.rfc2543_hold Specify whether to use inactive hold signaling. Parameter: account.X.hold_use_inactive Configure the call hold tone and call hold tone delay. Specify whether RFC 2543 (c=0.0.0.0) outgoing hold signaling Web User Interface is used.
  • Page 436 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.play_hold_tone.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Play Hold Tone Delay Phone User Interface: None sip.rfc2543_hold...
  • Page 437 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “sip.rfc2543_hold” is set to 0 (Disabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None To configure call hold tone and call hold tone delay via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information.

  • Page 438: Music On Hold (Moh)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of RFC 2543 Hold. Click Confirm to accept the change. Music on Hold (MoH) is the business practice of playing recorded music to fill the silence that would be heard by the party who has been placed on hold.
  • Page 439 Configures the SIP URI that provides the audio to play for the held party for account X. The URI points to a Music On Hold (MoH) server. Examples for valid values: <10.1.3.165>, 10.1.3.165, sip:moh@sip.com, <sip:moh@sip.com>, <yealink.com> or yealink.com. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S)

  • Page 440: Call Forward

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-Calling the Music On Hold server after holding X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 441 Configuring Basic Features incoming INVITE message by responding with a 302 Moved Temporarily message, which contains a Contact header with a new URI that should be tried. Three types of call forward: Always Forward -- Forward the incoming call immediately. ...
  • Page 442 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones account.X.always_fwd.enable account.X.always_fwd.target account.X.always_fwd.on_code account.X.always_fwd.off_code account.X.busy_fwd.enable account.X.busy_fwd.target account.X.busy_fwd.on_code account.X.busy_fwd.off_code account.X.timeout_fwd.enable account.X.timeout_fwd.target account.X.timeout_fwd.timeout account.X.timeout_fwd.on_code account.X.timeout_fwd.off_code Configure the call forward feature. Parameter: features.fwd.allow Specify the authorized numbers when call forward is activated. Parameters: <y0000000000xx>.cfg features.forward.emergency.enable...
  • Page 443 Configuring Basic Features Configure call forward in phone mode. Parameters: forward.always.enable forward.always.target forward.always.on_code forward.always.off_code forward.busy.enable forward.busy.target forward.busy.on_code forward.busy.off_code forward.no_answer.enable forward.no_answer.target forward.no_answer.timeout forward.no_answer.on_code forward.no_answer.off_code Configure diversion/history-info feature. Parameter: features.fwd_diversion_enable Configure forward international. Parameter: forward.international.enable Specify the authorized numbers when call forward is activated. Configure call forward.
  • Page 444 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configure forward international. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.fwd.allow 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the call forward feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), call forward feature cannot be activated and users are not allowed to configure call forward feature on the phone.
  • Page 445 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default If it is set to 1 (On), incoming calls to the account X are forwarded to the destination number (configured by the parameter “account.X.always_fwd.target”) immediately. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 446 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the always forward on code to activate the server-side always forward feature for account X. The IP phone will send the always forward on code and the pre-configured destination number (configured by the parameter “account.X.always_fwd.target”) to the server when you...
  • Page 447 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Features->Forward&DND->Forward->Always Forward->Off Code Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Call Forward->Always Forward->Off Code 0 or 1 account.X.busy_fwd.enable Description: Triggers busy forward feature to on or off for account X. 0-Off 1-On If it is set to 1 (On), incoming calls to the account X are forwarded to the destination number...
  • Page 448 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default account.1.busy_fwd.target = 3602 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled) and value of the parameter “features.fwd_mode” is set to 1 (Custom). It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 449 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default The IP phone will send the busy forward off code to the server when you deactivate busy forward feature for account X on the IP phone. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 450 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default String within 32 account.X.timeout_fwd.target Blank characters Description: Configures the destination number of the no answer forward for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G)
  • Page 451 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default String within 32 account.X.timeout_fwd.on_code Blank characters Description: Configures the no answer forward on code to activate the server-side no answer forward feature for account X. The IP phone will send the no answer forward on code and the pre-configured destination number (configured by the parameter “account.X.timeout_fwd.target”) to the server when you activate no answer forward feature for account X on the IP phone.
  • Page 452 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default account.1.timeout_fwd.off_code = *77 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled) and value of the parameter “features.fwd_mode” is set to 1 (Custom). It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 453 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Triggers the always forward feature to on or off for the IP phone. 0-Off 1-On If it is set to 1 (On), incoming calls are forwarded to the destination number (configured by the parameter “forward.always.target”) immediately.
  • Page 454 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled) and value of the parameter “features.fwd_mode” is set to 0 (Phone) (except SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones).
  • Page 455 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Features->Call Forward->Busy Forward->Busy Forward String within 32 forward.busy.target Blank characters Description: Configures the destination number of the busy forward for the IP phone. Example: forward.busy.target = 3602 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled) and value of the parameter “features.fwd_mode”...
  • Page 456 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default The IP phone will send the busy forward off code to the server when you deactivate busy forward feature on the IP phone. Example: forward.busy.off_code = *75 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd.allow”...
  • Page 457 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Features->Forward&DND->Forward->No Answer Forward->Target Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Call Forward->No Answer Forward->Forward to Integer from 0 to forward.no_answer.timeout Description: Configures ring times (N) to wait before forwarding incoming calls. Incoming calls will be forwarded when not answered after N*6 seconds. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd.allow”...
  • Page 458 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the no answer forward off code to deactivate the server-side no answer forward feature. The IP phone will send the no answer forward off code to the server when you deactivate no answer forward feature on the IP phone.
  • Page 459 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin)->FWD International->FWD International To specify the authorized numbers when call forward is enabled via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Forward Emergency. Enter the desired value in the Forward Authorized Numbers field.
  • Page 460 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones If you mark the Custom radio box: Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Mark the desired radio box in the Always/Busy/No Answer Forward field. Enter the destination number you want to forward in the Target field.
  • Page 461 Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Fwd International. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure call forward in phone mode via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Call Forward. Press to select the desired forwarding type, and then press the Enter soft key. Depending on your selection: If you select Always Forward: Press...
  • Page 462 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones On Code and Off Code field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the ring time to wait before forwarding from the After Ring Time field. The default ring time is 12 seconds.

  • Page 463: Call Transfer

    Configuring Basic Features No Answer Forward field. Enter the destination number you want to forward all unanswered incoming calls to in the Forward to field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the ring time to wait before forwarding from the After Ring Time field.
  • Page 464 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones whether to display the prompt "n New Missed Call(s)" ("n" indicates the number of the missed calls) on the destination party’s phone LCD screen. Procedure Call transfer can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 465 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default transfer.on_hook_trans_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to complete the semi-attended/attended transfer through on-hook besides pressing the Tran/Transfer soft key or TRAN/TRANSFER key. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: Semi-attended transfer means transfer a call after hearing the ringback tone; Attended transfer means transfer a call with prior consulting.

  • Page 466: Local Conference

    Transfer on Hook and Attended Transfer on Hook. Click Confirm to accept the change. Local Conference Local conference requires a host phone to process the audio of all parties. Yealink IP phones support up to 3 parties (including yourself) in a local conference call. Procedure Local conference can be configured using the configuration files.

  • Page 467: Network Conference

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default Note: The CONF key is only applicable to SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None Network Conference Network conference, also known as centralized conference, provides users with flexibility of call with multiple participants (more than three).
  • Page 468 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Conference Type...

  • Page 469: Transfer On Conference Hang Up

    Configuring Basic Features Enter the conference URI in the Conference URI field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Transfer on Conference Hang Up For a local three-way conference, all parties drop the call when the conference initiator drops the conference call. Transfer on conference hang up feature allows the other two parties to remain connected when the conference initiator drops the conference call.
  • Page 470 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default transfer.tran_others_after_conf_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to transfer the local conference call to the other two parties after the conference initiator drops the local conference call.

  • Page 471: Feature Key Synchronization

    Configuring Basic Features Feature Key Synchronization Feature key synchronization provides the capability to synchronize the status of the following features between the IP phone and the server: Do Not Disturb (DND)  Call Forwarding Always (CFA)  Call Forwarding Busy (CFB) ...

  • Page 472: Transfer Mode Via Dsskey

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones To configure feature key synchronization via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Feature Key Synchronization. Click Confirm to accept the change. Transfer Mode via Dsskey Transfer mode via dsskey enables IP phones to handle the current call differently via the DSS key.
  • Page 473 Configuring Basic Features Parameter: transfer.dsskey_deal_type Configure the transfer mode via dsskey. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-transfer&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default transfer.dsskey_deal_type 0, 1 or 2 Description: Configures the transfer mode when user presses the DSS key during an active call. 0-New Call 1-Attended Transfer 2-Blind Transfer...

  • Page 474: Allow Trans Exist Call

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Allow Trans Exist Call Allow trans exist call feature allows users to select transfer-to party’s call during multiple calls. It is convenient to transfer the active call to another existing call. It is not applicable to SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones.

  • Page 475: Directed Call Pickup

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default TRAN/TRANSFER key. If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the user can transfer the active call to a new call during multiple calls when the user presses the Tran/Transfer soft key or TRAN/TRANSFER key. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones.
  • Page 476 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones When you enable directed call pickup, the LCD screen will display a DPickup soft key when you pick up the handset, press the Speakerphone key or press the line key (You may need to press the More soft key to see the DPickup soft key).
  • Page 477 Configuring Basic Features expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Assign a directed call pickup key. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p= dsskey&q=load&model=0 Configure directed call pickup code on a per-line basis. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=a ccount-adv&q=load&acc=0 Configure directed call pickup feature on a phone basis. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=f eatures-callpickup&q=load Assign a directed call pickup key.
  • Page 478 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None features.pickup.direct_pickup_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the DPickup soft key when the IP phone is on the dialing screen.
  • Page 479 Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default linekey.X.type/ Refer to the following programablekey.X.type/ content expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Description: Configures a DSS key as a directed call pickup key on the IP phone. The digit 9 stands for the key type Direct Pickup. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G)
  • Page 480 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default The default value of the line key 1-12 is 15, and the default value of the line key 13-15 is 0. For SIP-T41P/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-15 is 0.
  • Page 481 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu). When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory).
  • Page 482 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For ext keys: For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones: When Y= 1 to 40, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 483 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Permitted Values: 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/S) 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) 1-Line 1 2-Line 2 … 16-Line 16 Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 484 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default For ext keys: For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40. For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).
  • Page 485 Configuring Basic Features To configure a directed call pickup key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key (or Programable Key). In the desired DSS key field, select Direct Pickup from the pull-down list of Type. Enter the directed call pickup code followed by the specific extension in the Value field. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.

  • Page 486: Group Call Pickup

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Directed Call Pickup. Enter the directed call pickup code in the Directed Call Pickup Code field. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 487 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Group call pickup can be configured using the following methods. Configure the group call pickup code on a per-line basis. Parameter: account.X.group_pickup_code <MAC>.cfg Configure group call pickup features on a phone basis. Parameters: features.pickup.group_pickup_enable Central features.pickup.group_pickup_code Provisioning Assign a group call pickup key.
  • Page 488 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 features.pickup.group_pickup_enable Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the GPickup soft key when the IP phone is on the dialing screen.
  • Page 489 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: features.pickup.group_pickup_code = *98 Note: The group call pickup code configured on a per-line basis (configured by the parameter “account.X.group_pickup_code”) takes precedence over that configured on a phone basis (configured by the parameter “features.pickup.group_pickup_code”). Web User Interface: Features->Call Pickup->Group Call Pickup Code Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 490 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default For ext keys: For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40. For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).
  • Page 491 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu).
  • Page 492 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=7, the default value is 51 (Switch Account Up). When X=8, the default value is 52 (Switch Account Down). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status).
  • Page 493 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys: X=1-10, 12-14 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S) X=1-10, 13 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G)
  • Page 494 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S)
  • Page 495 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys: X ranges from 1 to 4. For ext keys: For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40. For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).
  • Page 496 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Enter the group call pickup code in the Group Call Pickup Code field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure group call pickup feature on a phone basis via web user interface: Click on Features->Call Pickup.

  • Page 497: Dialog Info Call Pickup

    Configuring Basic Features field. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Enter the group call pickup code in the Value field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Dialog Info Call Pickup Call pickup is implemented through SIP signals on some specific servers.
  • Page 498 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones To: <sip:1058@10.2.1.48:5060> Call-ID: 0_572446084@10.10.20.18 CSeq: 1 INVITE Contact: <sip:1010@10.10.20.18:5060> Content-Type: application/sdp Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Replaces: 0_1756536024@10.10.20.34;to-tag=3779921438;from-tag=3408640225...
  • Page 499 Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Dialog Info Call Pickup Phone User Interface: None To configure dialog info call pickup via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced.

  • Page 500: Recent Call In Dialing

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Recent Call In Dialing Recent call in dialing feature allows users to view the placed calls list when the phone is on the dialing screen (lifts the handset, presses the Speakerphone key or desired line key). Users can select to place a call from the placed calls list.

  • Page 501: Recall

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None To configure recent call in dialing via web user interface: Click on Directory->Setting. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Recent Call In Dialing. Click Confirm to accept the change. ReCall ReCall, also known as last call return, allows users to place a call back to the last caller.
  • Page 502 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Assign a recall key. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =dsskey&q=load&model=0 Assign a recall key. Phone User Interface ReCall Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 948.
  • Page 503 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured). Example: linekey.2.type = 7 Default: For line keys: For SIP-T48G/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-29 is 0.
  • Page 504 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu). When X=5, the default value is 28 (History).
  • Page 505 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=10, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND).

  • Page 506: Call Number Filter

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys: X ranges from 1 to 4. For ext keys: For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40.
  • Page 507 Configuring Basic Features dialing. Procedure Call number filter can be configured using the following methods. Configure the characters the IP phone Central filters when dialing. Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) features.call_num_filter Configure the characters the IP phone filters when dialing. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=fea...

  • Page 508: Call Park

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Enter the desired characters in the Call Number Filter field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Call Park Call park allows users to park a call on a special extension and then retrieve it from another phone (for example, a phone in another office or conference room).
  • Page 509 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Call park can be configured using the following methods. Configure call park feature. Parameters: features.call_park.park_mode features.call_park.enable features.call_park.park_code features.call_park.park_retrieve_code features.call_park.direct_send.enable Assign a call park key. Central Provisioning Assign a retrieve park key. <y0000000000xx>.cfg (Configuration File) Parameters: linekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.line/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.line...
  • Page 510 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the call park mode. 1-FAC 2-Transfer Web User Interface: Features->Call Pickup->Call Park Mode Phone User Interface: None features.call_park.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the Park soft key during a call.
  • Page 511 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default This park retrieve code will also apply to the retrieve park key. Example: features.call_park.park_retrieve_code = *88 Web User Interface: Features->Call Pickup->Park Retrieve Code Phone User Interface: None features.call_park.direct_send.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to dial out the call park code/park retrieve code directly when pressing the Park/Retrieve soft key.
  • Page 512 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default The digit 10 stands for the key type Call Park. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G)
  • Page 513 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line key->Type Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Type linekey.X.line/ Refer to the following 1-16 correspond to expansion_module.X.key.Y.line content the lines 1-16 Description: Configures the desired line to apply the call park key.
  • Page 514 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Dsskey->Line key->Line Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Account ID linekey.X.value/ String within 99 Blank expansion_module.X.key.Y.value characters Description: Configures the call park code. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S)
  • Page 515 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For ext keys: For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40. For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).
  • Page 516 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40. For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).
  • Page 517 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the desired line to apply the retrieve park key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2)
  • Page 518 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S)
  • Page 519 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured). Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key->Label Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label...
  • Page 520 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired line from the pull-down list of Line. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a retrieve park key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select Retrieve Park from the pull-down list of Type.

  • Page 521: Calling Line Identification Presentation (Clip)

    Configuring Basic Features Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired account from the Account ID field. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Enter the retrieve park code in the Value field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
  • Page 522 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones If there is not any Privacy: id header in the INVITE request, the IP phone checks and presents the caller identification from the P-Preferred-Identity header. If there is not P-Preferred-Identity header in the INVITE request, the IP phone checks and presents the caller identification from the P-Asserted-Identity header.
  • Page 523 FROM header. Calling and Connected For more information on calling line identification presentation, refer to Line Identification Presentation on Yealink IP Phones Procedure CLIP can be configured using the following methods. Configure the presentation of the caller identity.
  • Page 524 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values 0-FROM 1-PAI 2-PAI-FROM 3-RPID-PAI-FROM 4-PAI-RPID-FROM 5-RPID-FROM 6-PREFERENCE If it is set to 6 (PREFERENCE), the IP phone uses the custom priority order for the sources of caller identity information (configured by the parameter “sip.cid_source.preference”).
  • Page 525 Configures the priority order for the sources of caller identity information. The headers can be in any order. Note: Yealink IP phones support deriving caller identity from the following SIP headers: From, P-Asserted-Identity (PAI), P-Preferred-Identity and Remote-Party-ID (RPID). It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.cid_source”...

  • Page 526: Connected Line Identification Presentation (Colp)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values None Phone User Interface: None To configure the presentation of the caller identity via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
  • Page 527 Connected Line Identification source = Dialed digits Yealink IP phones present the connected line identification according to the dialed digits. Connected Line Identification source = RFC4916 Yealink IP phones support to present the connected line identification from UPDATE message following the 4916.
  • Page 528 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-PAI-RPID 1-Dialed Digits 2-RFC 4916 When the RFC 4916 is enabled on the IP phone, the caller sends the SIP request message which contains the from-change tag in the Supported header. The caller then receives an UPDATE message from the callee, and displays the identity in the “From”...

  • Page 529: Mute

    None Mute Yealink IP phones support muting the microphone of the active audio device (handset, headset or speakerphone) during an active call or while dialing. You can activate the mute feature by pressing the MUTE key. Normally, mute feature is automatically deactivated when the active call ends.
  • Page 530 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 features.allow_mute Description: Enables or disables the allow mute feature for the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), you are allowed to mute an active call, or activate the mute feature on the pre-dialing/dialing/calling/ringing screen (Mute the microphone on the calling screen is only applicable to the SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones).

  • Page 531: Keep Mute

    Configuring Basic Features Keep mute, also known as persistent mute, allows you to keep the mute state of your phone persist across calls. Once the keep mute feature is enabled, you can activate the mute feature by pressing the MUTE key in an idle state or any other states (for SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones, you can only activate the mute feature by pressing the Cancel key on idle/pre-dialing/dialing/ringing/calling/talking screen).

  • Page 532: Intercom

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default None Phone User Interface: None Intercom Intercom allows establishing an audio conversation directly. The IP phone can answer intercom calls automatically. This feature depends on support from a SIP server.
  • Page 533 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Intercom can be configured using the following methods. Configure the intercom subscription. Parameters: features.intercom.led.enable features.intercom.subscribe.enable Assign an intercom key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ programablekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>. linekey.X.line/ programablekey.X.line/ (Configuration File) expansion_module.X.key.Y.line linekey.X.value/ programablekey.X.value/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.value linekey.X.pickup_value/ programablekey.X.pickup_value/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.pickup_value linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label...

  • Page 534: Intercom Key

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None features.intercom.subscribe.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables intercom subscription for the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 535 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys: X=1-10, 12-14 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S) X=1-10, 13 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G) X=1-14 (for SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G) X=1-10, 14 (for SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2) X=1-9, 13, 14 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) For ext keys: For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S:...
  • Page 536 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 51 (Switch Account Up). When X=8, the default value is 52 (Switch Account Down).
  • Page 537 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu).
  • Page 538 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default linekey.X.line/ programablekey.X.line/ Refer to the 1-16 for lines expansion_module.X.key.Y.line following content 1-16 Description: Configures the desired line to apply the intercom key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S)
  • Page 539 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Dsskey->Line key/Programable Key->Line Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Account ID linekey.X.value/ programablekey.X.value/ String within 99 Blank expansion_module.X.key.Y.value characters Description: Configures the intercom number. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P/T27G)
  • Page 540 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the pickup code for intercom feature. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G)
  • Page 541 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys: X ranges from 1 to 4.

  • Page 542: Incoming Intercom Calls

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Enter the remote extension number in the Value field. (Optional.) Enter the directed call pickup code in the Extension field.
  • Page 543 Configuring Basic Features Specify the channel mode when an incoming intercom call is answered. Parameter: features.intercom.headset_prior.enable Configure incoming intercom call feature. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=fe atures-intercom&q=load Configure incoming intercom call Phone User Interface feature. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default...
  • Page 544 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default (Enabled). Web User Interface: Features->Intercom->Intercom Mute Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Intercom->Intercom Mute features.intercom.tone 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to play a warning tone when answering an intercom call.

  • Page 545: Call Timeout

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the channel mode when an incoming intercom call is answered through headset. 0-Speaker Mode 1-Headset Mode Note: If you want to use a headset, physically connect your headset and activate the headset mode for use.

  • Page 546: Ringing Timeout

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure Call timeout can only be configured using the configuration files. Configure the duration time in the ringback state. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) phone_setting.ringback_timeout Details of the Configuration Parameter:...

  • Page 547: Send User=Phone

    Contact: <sip:1010@10.3.20.6:5060> Content-Type: application/sdp Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync Content-Length: 300 Procedure Send user=phone can be configured using the following methods. Configure send user=phone feature Central Provisioning on a per-line basis.
  • Page 548 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones account.X.enable_user_equal_phone Configure send user=phone feature on a per-line basis. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =account-adv&q=load&acc=0 Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 account.X.enable_user_equal_phone Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to add “user=phone” to the SIP header of the INVITE message for account X.

  • Page 549: Sip Send Mac

    From: "11" <sip:11@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=2788360609 To: "11" <sip:11@10.2.1.48:5060> Call-ID: 1_1863786852@10.3.20.14 CSeq: 2 REGISTER Contact: <sip:11@10.3.20.14:5060;line=cc75882e976e208> Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Expires: 0 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync Mac: 00:15:65:74:b1:50 Content-Length: 0...
  • Page 550 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure SIP send MAC can be configured using the following methods. Configure SIP send MAC on a per-line basis. Central Provisioning <MAC>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) account.X.register_mac Configure SIP send MAC on a per-line basis.

  • Page 551: Sip Send Line

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of SIP Send MAC. Click Confirm to accept the change. SIP Send Line The IP phone can send the line number in the REGISTER message. SIP send line allow adding “Line:<linenumber>”(e.g., Line: 1) to the SIP header of the REGISTER message.
  • Page 552 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Expires: 0 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync Line: 1 Content-Length: 0 Procedure SIP send line can be configured using the following methods.

  • Page 553: Reserve # In User Name

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None To configure SIP send Line feature via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of SIP Send Line. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 554 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync Content-Length: Procedure Reserve # in User Name can be configured using the following methods. Configure reserve # in user name. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg...

  • Page 555: Password Dial

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Reserve # in User Name. Click Confirm to accept the change. Password Dial Password dial feature allows the callee number to be partly displayed on the IP phone when placing a call.
  • Page 556 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Features->General Information->PswDial Phone User Interface: None String within 32 Blank features.password_dial.prefix characters Description: Configures the prefix of the password dial number. Example: features.password_dial.prefix = 12 Web User Interface: Features->General Information->PswPrefix...

  • Page 557: Unregister When Reboot

    Configuring Basic Features Enter the desired number of hidden digits in the PswLength field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Unregister When Reboot Unregister when reboot feature allows IP phones to unregister first before re-registering the account when finishing a reboot. Procedure Unregister when reboot can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 558 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default finishing a reboot. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)

  • Page 559: 100 Reliable Retransmission

    From: "1025" <sip:1025@pbx.yealink.com:5060>;tag=1622206783 To: <sip:1024@pbx.yealink.com:5060> Call-ID: 0_537569052@10.3.6.197 CSeq: 2 INVITE Contact: <sip:1025@10.3.6.197:5060> Authorization: Digest username="1025", realm="pbx.yealink.com", nonce="BroadWorksXi5stub71Ts2nb05BW", uri="sip:1024@pbx.yealink.com:5060", response="f7e9d35c55af45b3f89beae95e913171", algorithm=MD5, cnonce="0a4f113b", qop=auth, nc=00000001 Content-Type: application/sdp Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25...
  • Page 560 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 account.X.100rel_enable Description: Enables or disables the 100 reliable retransmission feature for account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G)

  • Page 561: Reboot In Talking

    Configuring Basic Features Reboot in Talking Reboot in talking feature allows IP phones to reboot during an active call when it receives a reboot request by action URI. For more information on action URI, refer to Action URI on page 693.

  • Page 562: Answer By Hand

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Reboot in Talking field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.

  • Page 563: Usb Recording

    You can record the audio call by pressing the Start REC soft key during a call. Yealink IP phones also support recording calls by pressing record/URL record key. For more information, refer to Dsskey Recording (Record and URL Record) on page 655.
  • Page 564 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure USB Recording feature can be only configured using the configuration files. Configure the recording feature on a phone basis. <y0000000000xx>.cf Parameter: features.usb_call_recording.enable Central Provisioning Configure the recording feature on a (Configuration File) per-line basis.

  • Page 565: Csta Control

    Configuring Basic Features CSTA Control User Agent Computer Supported Telecommunications Applications (uaCSTA) is explained in detail in Using CSTA for SIP Phone User Agents (uaCSTA) Services for Computer Supported Telecommunications Applications Phase III. It standardizes a very powerful and flexible set of application services to observe and control voice and non-voice media calls as well as control and observe non-call related features.

  • Page 566: Quick Login

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones To configure uaCSTA feature via web user interface: Click on Features->Remote Control. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of the CSTA Control. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.
  • Page 567 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Quick login can be configured using the configuration files. Configure quick login. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) wui.quick_login Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default wui.quick_login 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the quick login feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), you can quickly log into the web user interface using a request URI...
  • Page 568 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones...

  • Page 569: Configuring Advanced Features

    Configuring Advanced Features Configuring Advanced Features This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following advanced features: Remote Phone Book  Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)  Busy Lamp Field (BLF)  Busy Lamp Field (BLF) List  Hide Feature Access Codes ...

  • Page 570: Remote Phone Book

    URL of the file (Menu.xml) in the configuration files. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for remote XML phone book template. You can also obtain the remote XML phone book template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 571 Configuring Advanced Features Where: Specify the contact name between <Name> and </Name>. Specify the contact number between <Telephone> and </Telephone>. Save the file and place this file to the provisioning server. When creating a Menu.xml file, learn the following: <YealinkIPPhoneMenu> indicates the start of a remote phone book file and ...
  • Page 572 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones For each department that you want to add, add the following strings to the file. Each starts on a separate line: <MenuItem> Department1 <Name> </Name> http://10.2.9.1:99/Department.xml <URL> </URL> </MenuItem> For each XML file that you want to add, add the following strings to the file. Each starts on a separate line: <SoftKeyItem>...
  • Page 573 During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.1.20”, and downloads the remote phone book file “Menu.xml”. Yealink supplies a phonebook generation tool to generate a remote XML phone book. For more Note Yealink Phonebook Generation Tool User Guide...
  • Page 574 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones the remote phone book for outgoing/incoming calls. Specify how often the IP phone refreshes the local cache of the remote phone book. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=contacts -remote&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters...
  • Page 575 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the display name of the remote phone book. Example: remote_phonebook.display_name = Friends “Friends” will be displayed on the LCD screen at the phone path Menu->Directory. If it is left blank, Remote Phone Book will be the display name. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S IP phones.
  • Page 576 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default features.remote_phonebook.enter_update_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to refresh the local cache of the remote phone book at a time when accessing the remote phone book.

  • Page 577: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (Ldap)

    Configuring Advanced Features Enter the desired time in the Update Time Interval(Seconds) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) LDAP is an application protocol for accessing and maintaining information services for the distributed directory over an IP network. IP phones can be configured to interface with a corporate directory server that supports LDAP version 2 or 3.
  • Page 578 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones LDAP Attributes The following table lists the most common attributes used to configure the LDAP lookup on IP phones. Abbreviation Name Description givenName First name LDAP attribute is made up from given commonName name joined to surname.
  • Page 579 Configuring Advanced Features ldap.call_in_lookup ldap.call_out_lookup ldap.ldap_sort ldap.incoming_call_special_search.e nable Assign an LDAP key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ programablekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Configure LDAP. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =contacts-LDAP&q=load Web User Interface Assign an LDAP key. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =dsskey&q=load&model=0 Assign an LDAP key. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters...
  • Page 580 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default ldap.search_type 0 or 1 Description: Configures the search type for LDAP contact look up. 0-Prefix matching 1-Approximate string matching If it is set to 0 (Prefix matching), the IP phone will search the LDAP contact numbers or names start with the entered character(s).
  • Page 581 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default characters Description: Configures the search criteria for LDAP contact numbers look up. The “*” symbol in the filter stands for any number. The “%” symbol in the filter stands for the number entered by the user. Example: ldap.number_filter = (|(telephoneNumber=%)(mobile=%)(ipPhone=%)) When the number of the telephoneNumber, mobile or ipPhone of the contact record...
  • Page 582 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the IP address or domain name of the LDAP server. Example: ldap.host = 10.2.1.55 Web User Interface: Directory->LDAP->Server Address Phone User Interface: None Integer from 1 to ldap.port...
  • Page 583 Configures the user name used to login the LDAP server. This parameter can be left blank in case the server allows anonymous to login. Otherwise you will need to provide the user name to login the LDAP server. Example: ldap.user = cn=manager,dc=yealink,dc=cn Web User Interface: Directory->LDAP->Username Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 584 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default String within 99 ldap.name_attr Blank characters Description: Configures the name attributes of each record to be returned by the LDAP server. It compresses the search results. You can configure multiple name attributes separated by spaces.
  • Page 585 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Directory->LDAP->LDAP Display Name Phone User Interface: None ldap.version 2 or 3 Description: Configures the LDAP protocol version supported by the IP phone. Make sure the protocol value corresponds with the version assigned on the LDAP server. Web User Interface: Directory->LDAP->Protocol Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 586 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default ldap.ldap_sort 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to sort the search results in alphabetical order or numerical order. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Directory->LDAP->LDAP Sorting Results...
  • Page 587 Configuring Advanced Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default linekey.X.type/ Refer to the programablekey.X.type/ following content expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Description: Configures a DSS key as an LDAP key on the IP phone. The digit 38 stands for the key type LDAP. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G)
  • Page 588 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default The default value of the line key 1-12 is 15, and the default value of the line key 13-15 is 0. For SIP-T41P/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-15 is 0.
  • Page 589 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu). When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory).
  • Page 590 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For ext keys: For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones: When Y= 1 to 40, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 591 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label To configure LDAP via web user interface: Click on Directory->LDAP. Enter the values in the corresponding fields. Select the desired values from the corresponding pull-down lists. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 592: Busy Lamp Field (Blf)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones To configure an LDAP key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys. Select the desired DSS key. Press , or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field.
  • Page 593 Configuring Advanced Features Contact: <sip:1010@10.3.20.1:5060> Accept: application/dialog-info+xml Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Expires: 30 Event: dialog Content-Length: 0 Example of a NOTIFY message (<state>confirmed</state> shows the call has been established): NOTIFY sip:1010@10.3.20.1:5060 SIP/2.0 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.3.20.2:5060;branch=z9hG4bK276311022 From: <sip:1011@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=3436332841 To: "1010" <sip:1010@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=3098567568 Call-ID: 0_4117916748@10.3.20.1...
  • Page 594 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure BLF can be configured using the following methods. Configure the period of the BLF subscription. Parameter: account.X.blf.subscribe_period Central Configure the event of the BLF subscription. Provisioning <MAC>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration account.X.blf.subscribe_event...
  • Page 595 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Subscribe Period(Seconds) Phone User Interface: None account.X.blf.subscribe_event 0 or 1 Description: Configures the event of the BLF subscription for account X. 0-dialog 1-presence X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 596 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Account->Advanced->Out Dialog BLF Phone User Interface: None To configure BLF subscription via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.

  • Page 597: Visual Alert And Audio Alert For Blf Pickup

    Configuring Advanced Features Visual and audio alert for BLF pickup allow the supervisor’s phone to play a specific ring tone and display a visual prompt (e.g., “6001<-6002”, 6001 is the monitored extension which receives an incoming call from 6002) when the monitored user receives an incoming call. In addition to the BLF key, visual alert for BLF pickup feature enables the supervisor to pick up the monitored user’s incoming call by pressing the DPickup soft key.
  • Page 598 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display a visual alert when the monitored user receives an incoming call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.

  • Page 599: Blf Led Mode

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Features->Call Pickup->Ring Type for BLF Pickup Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Sound->BLF Ring Type To configure visual alert and audio alert for BLF pickup via web user interface: Click on Features->Call Pickup. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Visual Alert for BLF Pickup. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Audio Alert for BLF Pickup.
  • Page 600 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Line key/Expansion Module Key LED (configured as a BLF key or a BLF List key and BLF LED Mode is set to 0) LED Status Description Solid green The monitored user is idle.
  • Page 601 Configuring Advanced Features Line Key/Expansion Module Key LED (configured as a BLF key or a BLF List key and BLF LED Mode is set to 3) LED Status Description Fast-flashing green The monitored user receives an incoming call. (200ms) The monitored user is dialing. The monitored user is talking.

  • Page 602: Configuring Blf Led Status And Blf Key Behavior

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default status. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. For the Genband server, you can set the value of this parameter to 4. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->BLF LED Mode...
  • Page 603 Configuring Advanced Features bargein - barge in and set up a conference call  (e.g., 1234$Tinvite$) - execute a series of macro action strings custom EDK macros  Procedure BLF LED status and BLF key behavior can be configured using the configuration files. Configure BLF LED status and BLF key behavior when the monitored user is idle.
  • Page 604 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones blf.enhanced.talking.callin.action blf.enhanced.talking.talking.action blf.enhanced.talking.idle.action Configure BLF LED status and BLF key behavior when a call is being parked against the monitored phone. Parameters: blf.enhanced.parked.enable blf.enhanced.parked.led blf.enhanced.parked.callin.action blf.enhanced.parked.talking.action blf.enhanced.parked.idle.action Details of Configuration Parameters:...
  • Page 605 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default and then goes out. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. It works only if the value of the parameter “blf.enhanced.idle.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None blf.enhanced.idle.idle.action...
  • Page 606 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default blf.enhanced.idle.talking.action String Blank Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list key if the monitor is talking and monitored user is idle. Example: blf.enhanced.idle.talking.action = newcall Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 607 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default and then goes out when the monitored user is ringing. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. It works only if the value of the parameter “blf.enhanced.callin.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 608 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list key if the monitor is talking and monitored user is ringing. Example: blf.enhanced.callin.talking.action = newcall Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. It works only if the value of the parameter “blf.enhanced.callin.enable”...
  • Page 609 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default parameter “blf.enhanced.callout.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None blf.enhanced.callout.idle.action String Blank Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list key if the monitor is idle and monitored user is calling out.
  • Page 610 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list key if the monitor is talking and monitored user is calling out. Example: blf.enhanced.callout.talking.action = newcall Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. It works only if the value of the parameter “blf.enhanced.callout.enable”...
  • Page 611 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default parameter “blf.enhanced.talking.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None blf.enhanced.talking.idle.action String Blank Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list key if the monitor is idle and monitored user is talking.
  • Page 612 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list key if the monitor and monitored user are talking. Example: blf.enhanced.talking.talking.action = newcall Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. It works only if the value of the parameter “blf.enhanced.talking.enable”...
  • Page 613 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default parameter “blf.enhanced.parked.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None blf.enhanced.parked.idle.action String Blank Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list key if the monitor is idle and a call is being parked against the monitored phone.

  • Page 614: Configuring A Blf Key

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list key if the monitor is talking and a call is being parked against the monitored phone. Example: blf.enhanced.parked.talking.action = newcall Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 615 Configuring Advanced Features &q=load&model=0 Assign a BLF key. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values linekey.X.type/ Refer to the following expansion_module.X.key.Y.type content Description: Configures a DSS key as a BLF key on the IP phone. The digit 16 stands for the key type BLF. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G)
  • Page 616 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-21 is 0. For SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: The default value is 15.
  • Page 617 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) 1-Line 1 2-Line 2 … 16-Line 16 Example: linekey.2.line = 1 Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key->Line Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Account ID...
  • Page 618 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Value linekey.X.pickup_value/ String within Blank expansion_module.X.key.Y.pickup_value 256 characters Description: Configures the pickup code for BLF feature. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S)
  • Page 619 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For ext keys: For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40. For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).

  • Page 620: Busy Lamp Field (Blf) List

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Enter the phone number or extension you want to monitor in the Value field. (Optional.) Enter the directed call pickup code in the Extension field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
  • Page 621 Configuring Advanced Features Assign a BLF List key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.line/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.line Configure BLF List. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=accou nt-adv&q=load&acc=0 Web User Interface Assign a BLF List key. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=dsske y&q=load&model=0 Assign a BLF List key. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values...
  • Page 622 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 2-Line Key (first page)->Ext Key (first page on Expansion1->first page on Expansion2…)->Line Key (second page)->Ext Key (second page on Expansion1->second page on Expansion2…)… 3-Ext Key (first page on Expansion1->first page on Expansion2…)->Line Key (first page)->Ext Key (second page on Expansion1->second page on Expansion2…)->Line Key...
  • Page 623 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) Example: account.1.blf_list_code = *97 Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 624 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) Example: account.1.blf_list_retrieve_call_parked_code = *88 Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 625 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: linekey.2.type = 39 Default: For line keys: For SIP-T48G/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-29 is 0. For SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-27 is 0.
  • Page 626 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2)

  • Page 627: Hide Feature Access Codes

    Configuring Advanced Features (Optional.) Enter the retrieve call parked code in the BLF List Retrieve Call Parked Code field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure BLF List keys manually via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select BLF List from the pull-down list of Type. Repeat the step 2, configure more BLF list keys.
  • Page 628 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Pick up  Group Pick up  Barge In (not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones)  Retrieve  Call Park  Call Pull (not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones) ...

  • Page 629: Automatic Call Distribution (Acd)

    Configuring Advanced Features Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Hide Feature Access Codes. Click Confirm to accept the change. Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) ACD enables organizations to manage a large number of phone calls on an individual basis. ACD enables the use of IP phones in a call-center role by automatically distributing incoming calls to available users, or agents.
  • Page 630 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones account.X.acd.available account.X.subscribe_acd_expires Configure ACD auto available. Parameters: acd.auto_available acd.auto_available_timer Assign an ACD key. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameters: linekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Configure ACD auto available. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-acd&q=load Web User Interface Assign an ACD key.
  • Page 631 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None account.X.acd.available 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the Available/Avail or Unavailable/Unavail soft key for account X after the IP phone logs into the ACD system.
  • Page 632 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.acd.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->ACD Subscribe Period(120~3600s) Phone User Interface: None acd.auto_available...
  • Page 633 Configuring Advanced Features ACD Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 948. Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values linekey.X.type/ Refer to the following expansion_module.X.key.Y.type content Description: Configures a DSS key to be an ACD key on the IP phone.
  • Page 634 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values For SIP-T27P/G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-21 is 0. For SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: The default value is 15.
  • Page 635 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label To configure an ACD key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select ACD from the pull-down list of Type. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.

  • Page 636: Shared Call Appearance (Sca)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Enter the desired timer in the ACD Subscribe Period(120~3600s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure an ACD key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys. Select the desired DSS key.
  • Page 637 Configuring Advanced Features SCA supports the IP phones barging in an active call. In addition, SCA has the call pull capability. Call pull feature allows users to retrieve an existing call from another shared phone that is in active or public hold status. If the call is placed on public hold, the held call is available for any shared party to retrieve.
  • Page 638 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Assign a private hold key. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p= dsskey&q=load&model=0 Assign a private hold key. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.shared_line 0, 1 or 3 Description: Configures the registration line type for account X.
  • Page 639 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.shared_line” is set to 1 (Share Call Appearance). It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Call Pull Feature Access Code Phone User Interface: None Private Hold Soft Key...
  • Page 640 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None Private Hold Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 948. Details of Configuration Parameters:...
  • Page 641 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values For SIP-T42G/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-12 is 15, and the default value of the line key 13-15 is 0. For SIP-T41P/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-15 is 0. For SIP-T27P/G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-21 is 0.
  • Page 642 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40. For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).
  • Page 643 Configuring Advanced Features Click on Advanced, select Shared Call Appearance from the pull-down list of Shared Line. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the shared line settings on alternate phone via web user interface: Register the alternate account (e.g., 4609_1). (Enter the primary account 4609 in the Register Name field.)
  • Page 644 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Click on Advanced, select Shared Call Appearance from the pull-down list of Shared Line. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the call pull feature access code via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced.
  • Page 645 Configuring Advanced Features To configure the private hold soft key via web user interface: Click on Settings->Softkey Layout. Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Custom Softkey. Select On Talk from the pull-down list of Call States. Select PriHold from the Unselected Softkeys column and then click The PriHold appears in the Selected Softkeys column.

  • Page 646: Bridge Lines Appearance (Bla)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Bridge Lines Appearance (BLA) BLA allows users to share a SIP line on two or more IP phones. Users can monitor the specific extension (BLA number) for status changes on each IP phone. To use this feature, a BLA group should be pre-configured on the server and one of them is specified as a BLA number.
  • Page 647 Configuring Advanced Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.shared_line 0, 1 or 3 Description: Configures the registration line type for account X. 0-Disabled 1-Shared Call Appearance 3-Draft BLA If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the shared line feature is disabled. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 648 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Account->Advanced->BLA Number Phone User Interface: None Integer from 60 to account.X.bla_subscribe_period 7200 Description: Configures the period (in seconds) of the BLA subscription for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G)

  • Page 649: Message Waiting Indicator (Mwi)

    Configuring Advanced Features Enter the desired value in the BLA Subscription Period field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) informs users of the number of messages waiting in their mailbox without calling the mailbox. IP phones support both audio and visual MWI when receiving new voice messages.
  • Page 650 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods. Configure subscribe for MWI. Parameters: account.X.subscribe_mwi account.X.subscribe_mwi_expires Configure subscribe MWI to voice mail. Parameter: account.X.subscribe_mwi_to_vm Central Provisioning <MAC>.cfg Configure the voice mail number on a (Configuration File) per-line basis.
  • Page 651 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will send a SUBSCRIBE message to the server for message-summary updates. If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the server automatically sends a message-summary NOTIFY in a new dialog each time the MWI status changes.
  • Page 652 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.subscribe_mwi_to_vm 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to subscribe the message waiting indicator to the voice mail number for account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone will subscribe the message waiting indicator to the account X.
  • Page 653 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Account->Advanced->Voice Mail Phone User Interface: Menu->Message->Voice Mail->Set Voice Mail->AccountX Code account.X.display_mwi.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to present audio and visual MWI when receiving new voice messages. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S)
  • Page 654 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Enter the period time in the MWI Subscription Period(Seconds) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure subscribe MWI to voice mail via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.

  • Page 655: Short Message Service (Sms)

    Click Confirm to accept the change. Short Message Service (SMS) SMS feature allows users to send and receive text messages using Yealink IP phones. It depends on support from a SIP server. You can send text messages by initiating a new dialogue or by replying to a received message.

  • Page 656: Multicast Paging

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones When receiving a new text message, the phone will play a warning tone. The power indicator LED will slowly flash red, and the LCD screen will prompt receiving new text messages with the number of waiting messages or a flashing icon.

  • Page 657: Sending Rtp Stream

     supporting paging with Yealink IP phones running firmware version 80 or prior (e.g., Cisco IP phones) are all grouped into the channel 0. This is for compatibility with the old Yealink IP phones and third-party devices. 1 to 25: each corresponds to the Polycom’s channel 1 to 25 respectively. This is for ...
  • Page 658 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configure the channel of the multicast paging group for a paging list key. Parameter: multicast.paging_address.X.channel Assign a multicast paging key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ programablekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.value/ programablekey.X.value/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.value linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label linekey.X.extension/ programablekey.X.extension/...
  • Page 659 Configuring Advanced Features http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=dsskey &q=load&model=0 Configure the multicast IP address and port number for a paging list key. Configure the multicast paging group name for a paging list key. Phone User Interface Configure the channel of the multicast paging group for a paging list key. Assign a multicast paging key or a paging list key.
  • Page 660 Configures the channel of the multicast paging group in the paging list. If it is set to 0, all the Yealink IP phones running firmware version 80 or prior or Yealink IP phones listens to channel 0 or third-party available devices (e.g., Cisco IP phones) in the paging group can receive the RTP stream.
  • Page 661 Configuring Advanced Features Multicast Paging Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 948. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default linekey.X.type/ Refer to the following programablekey.X.type/ content expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Description: Configures a DSS key as a multicast paging key on the IP phone.
  • Page 662 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default For SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-27 is 0. For SIP-T42G/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-12 is 15, and the default value of the line key 13-15 is 0.
  • Page 663 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=10, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND).
  • Page 664 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=8, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status).
  • Page 665 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default For ext keys: For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40. For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured). Example: linekey.2.value = 224.5.6.20:10008 Note: The valid multicast IP addresses range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
  • Page 666 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label linekey.X.extension/ String within 256 programablekey.X.extension/ Blank characters expansion_module.X.key.Y.extension Description: Configures the channel of multicast paging group. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S)
  • Page 667 Configuring Advanced Features Paging List key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 948. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default linekey.X.type/ programablekey.X.type/ Refer to the expansion_module.X.key.Y.type following content Description: Configures a DSS key as a paging list key on the IP phone.
  • Page 668 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-27 is 0. For SIP-T42G/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-12 is 15, and the default value of the line key 13-15 is 0.
  • Page 669 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu).
  • Page 670 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=7, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=8, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 671 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Dsskey->Line Key/Programable Key->Label Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label To configure a codec for multicast paging via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired codec from the pull-down list of Multicast Codec. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 672 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired channel from the pull-down list Channel. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a multicast paging key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key (or Programable Key).

  • Page 673: Receiving Rtp Stream

    Configuring Advanced Features (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a multicast paging key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys. Select the desired DSS key. Press , or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field.
  • Page 674 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones paging calls with higher or equal priority are automatically answered and the ones with lower priority are ignored. Ignore DND This parameter defines the lowest priority of the multicast paging call that can be received when DND is activated in phone mode.
  • Page 675 If it is set to 1 to 25, the IP phone can receive an RTP stream of the pre-configured multicast address on the channel 1 to 25 respectively from Yealink or Polycom IP phones. It it is set to 26 to 30, the IP phone can receive the RTP stream of the pre-configured...
  • Page 676 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default multicast address on the channel 26 to 30 respectively from Yealink IP phones. Example: multicast.listen_address.1.channel = 2 Web User Interface: Directory->Multicast IP->Multicast Listening->Channel Phone User Interface: None multicast.listen_address.X.volume...
  • Page 677 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None multicast.receive_priority.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to handle the incoming multicast paging calls when there is an active multicast paging call on the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone will ignore the incoming multicast paging calls when there is an active multicast paging call on the IP phone.
  • Page 678 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None multicast.receive.ignore_dnd.priority Integer from 0 to 31 Description: Configures the lowest priority of the multicast paging call that can be received when DND is activated in phone mode.

  • Page 679: Dsskey Recording (Record And Url Record)

    Dsskey Recording (Record and URL Record) Yealink IP phones support record calls by pressing the call record key. It depends on support from a SIP server. When the user presses the call record key, the IP phone sends a record request to the server.

  • Page 680: Url Record

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Content-Length: 0 When the user presses the record key for the second time, the IP phone sends a SIP INFO message to the server with the specific header “Record: off”, and then the recording stops.
  • Page 681 Configuring Advanced Features <Title> </Title> <Text> Probably the recording box is full. </Text> <YealinkIPPhoneText> When the user presses the URL record key for the second time, the IP phone sends an HTTP GET message to the server, and then the server will respond with a 200 OK message. Example of a 200 OK message: <YealinkIPPhoneText>...
  • Page 682 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Assign a record key and URL record Phone User Interface key. Record Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 948.
  • Page 683 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default The default value of the line key 1-12 is 15, and the default value of the line key 13-15 is 0. For SIP-T41P/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-15 is 0. For SIP-T27P/G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-21 is 0.
  • Page 684 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key->Label Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label URL Record Key Parameters Permitted Values Default linekey.X.type/...
  • Page 685 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-27 is 0. For SIP-T42G/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-12 is 15, and the default value of the line key 13-15 is 0. For SIP-T41P/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-15 is 0.
  • Page 686 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured). Example: linekey.2.value = http://10.3.5.97:8080/URLRecord/record.xml Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 687 Configuring Advanced Features (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a URL record key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select URL Record from the pull-down list of Type. Enter the URL in the Value field.

  • Page 688: Hot Desking

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Hot Desking Hot desking originates from the definition of being the temporary physical occupant of a work station or surface by a particular employee. A primary motivation for hot desking is cost reduction.
  • Page 689 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of register name on the hot desking login wizard when pressing the Hot Desking key. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None hotdesking.dsskey_username_enable 0 or 1...
  • Page 690 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values wizard when pressing the Hot Desking key. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None hotdesking.dsskey_outbound_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of outbound server on the hot desking login wizard when pressing the Hot Desking key.
  • Page 691 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys: X=1-10, 12-14 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S) X=1-14 (for SIP-T29G)
  • Page 692 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu). When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 51 (Switch Account Up).
  • Page 693 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For ext keys: For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones: When Y= 1 to 40, the default value is 0 (NA). For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones: When Y= 1, 21, the default value is 37 (Switch).

  • Page 694: Logon Wizard

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label To configure a hot desking key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select Hot Desking from the pull-down list of Type.
  • Page 695 Configuring Advanced Features hotdesking.startup_password_enable hotdesking.startup_sip_server_enable hotdesking.startup_outbound_enable Configure the logon wizard. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=feature s-general&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 phone_setting.logon_wizard Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to provide the logon wizard during the first startup. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if there is no registered account on the IP phone.
  • Page 696 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of user name on the logon wizard during the first startup. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if there is no registered account on the IP phone and the value of the parameter “phone_setting.logon_wizard”...
  • Page 697 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None hotdesking.startup_outbound_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of outbound server on the logon wizard during the first startup. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if there is no registered account on the IP phone and the value of the parameter “phone_setting.logon_wizard”...

  • Page 698: Action Url

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Action URL Action URL allows IP phones to interact with web server applications by sending an HTTP or HTTPS GET request. You can specify a URL that triggers a GET request when a specified event occurs.
  • Page 699 Configuring Advanced Features Event Description UnHeld When a held call is resumed. Mute When the IP phone mutes a call. UnMute When the IP phone un-mutes a call. Missed Call When the IP phone misses a call. IP Changed When the IP address of the IP phone changes. Idle To Busy When the state of the IP phone changes from idle to busy.
  • Page 700 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones The following table lists pre-defined variable values. Variable Value Description $mac The MAC address of the IP phone. The IP address of the IP phone. $model The IP phone model. $firmware The firmware version of the IP phone.
  • Page 701 Configuring Advanced Features Procedure Action URL can be configured using the following methods. Configure action URL. Parameters: action_url.setup_completed action_url.registered action_url.unregistered action_url.register_failed action_url.off_hook action_url.on_hook action_url.incoming_call action_url.outgoing_call action_url.call_established action_url.dnd_on action_url.dnd_off action_url.always_fwd_on action_url.always_fwd_off action_url.busy_fwd_on action_url.busy_fwd_off Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg action_url.no_answer_fwd_on (Configuration File) action_url.no_answer_fwd_off action_url.transfer_call action_url.blind_transfer_call action_url.attended_transfer_call action_url.hold...
  • Page 702 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones action_url.reject_incoming_call action_url.answer_new_incoming_call action_url.transfer_finished action_url.transfer_failed action_url.setup_autop_finish action_url.call_waiting_on action_url.call_waiting_off action_url.headset action_url.handfree action_url.cancel_callout action_url.remote_busy action_url.call_remote_canceled Configure action URL. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=f eatures-actionurl&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default action_url.setup_completed...
  • Page 703 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default $call_id  $callerID  $calledNumber  Example: action_url.setup_completed = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Setup Completed Phone User Interface: None action_url.registered Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends after an account is registered. Example: action_url.registered = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface:...
  • Page 704 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: action_url.register_failed = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Register Failed Phone User Interface: None action_url.off_hook Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when off hook.
  • Page 705 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Incoming Call Phone User Interface: None action_url.outgoing_call Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when placing a call. Example: action_url.outgoing_call = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Outgoing Call Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 706 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None action_url.dnd_off Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when DND feature is deactivated. Example: action_url.dnd_off = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Close DND...
  • Page 707 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when busy forward feature is activated. Example: action_url.busy_fwd_on = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Open Busy Forward Phone User Interface: None action_url.busy_fwd_off Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when busy forward feature is deactivated.
  • Page 708 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: action_url.no_answer_fwd_off = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Close NoAnswer Forward Phone User Interface: None action_url.transfer_call Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when performing a transfer.
  • Page 709 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Attended Transfer Phone User Interface: None action_url.hold Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when placing a call on hold. Example: action_url.hold = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Hold Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 710 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None action_url.unheld Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when a call being held is resumed. Example: action_url.unheld = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip...
  • Page 711 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when missing a call. Example: action_url.missed_call = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Missed Call Phone User Interface: None action_url.call_terminated Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when terminating a call.
  • Page 712 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when changing the state of the IP phone from idle to busy. Example: action_url.idle_to_busy = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Idle To Busy...
  • Page 713 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when rejecting an incoming call. Example: action_url.reject_incoming_call = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Reject Incoming Call Phone User Interface: None action_url.answer_new_incoming_call Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when answering a new incoming call.
  • Page 714 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default action_url.transfer_failed = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Transfer Failed Phone User Interface: None action_url.setup_autop_finish Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when completing auto provisioning via power on.
  • Page 715 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Close Call Waiting Phone User Interface: None action_url.headset Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when pressing the HEADSET key. Example: action_url.headset = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Headset Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 716 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Features->Action URL->Cancel Call Out Phone User Interface: None action_url.remote_busy Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when the outgoing call is rejected.

  • Page 717: Action Uri

    SIP Notify Message In addition, Yealink IP phones support performing the specified action immediately by accepting a SIP NOTIFY message with the “Event: ACTION-URI” header from a SIP proxy server. The message body of the SIP NOTIFY message may contain variable named as “key” and variable value, which are separated by “=”.
  • Page 718 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Example of a SIP Notify with the variable value (OK): Message Header NOTIFY sip:3583@10.2.40.10:5062 SIP/2.0 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.2.40.27:5063;branch=z9hG4bK4163876675 From: <sip:3586@10.2.1.48>;tag=2900480538 To: "3583" <sip:3583@10.2.1.48>;tag=490600926 Call-ID: 2923387519@10.2.40.10 CSeq: 4 NOTIFY Contact: <sip:3586@10.2.40.27:5063> Max-Forwards: 70...
  • Page 719 Configuring Advanced Features Variable Value Phone Action Press the line keys (for SIP-T48G/S, X=29; for SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G, X=27; for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S, X=15; for L1-LX SIP-T27P/G, X=21; for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G, X=3; for SIP-T21(P) E2, X=2). F1-F4 Press the soft keys. Press the MESSAGE key. HEADSET Press the HEADSET key.
  • Page 720 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Variable Value Phone Action CALLEND End a call. Get firmware version, registration, DND or forward configuration information. The valid value of “x” is 0 or 1, 0 means you do not need to get configuration information. 1 means you want to get configuration information.
  • Page 721 IP phone is during a call. When authentication is required, you can use the following URI format: http(s)://username:password@<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?key=variable value http(s)://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?key=variable value&@username:password Yealink IP phones also support a combination of the variable values in the URI, but the order of...

  • Page 722: Configuring Trusted Ip Address For Action Uri

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones the variable value is determined by the operation of the phone. The valid URI format is: http(s)://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?key=variable value[;variable value] . Variable values are separated by a semicolon from each other. This method is not applicable to SIP-T48G/S IP phones.
  • Page 723 Configuring Advanced Features sending the action URI to the IP phone. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=f eatures-remotecontrl&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.action_uri.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to receive the action URI requests. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface:...
  • Page 724 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the IP address of the server from which the IP phone receives the action URI requests. For discontinuous IP addresses, multiple IP addresses are separated by commas.

  • Page 725: Scenario A - Capturing The Current Screen Of The Phone

    Configuring Advanced Features You can capture the screen display of the IP phone using the action URI. IP phones support handling an HTTP or HTTPS GET request. The URI format is http(s)://<phoneIPAddress>/screencapture. The captured picture can be saved as a BMP or JPEG file.

  • Page 726: Scenario B - Placing A Call Via Web User Interface

    Else, the browser will display an image showing the phone’s current screen directly. You can save the image to your local system. Frequent capture may affect the phone performance. Yealink recommend you to capture the Note phone screen display within a minimum interval of 4 seconds.

  • Page 727: Server Redundancy

    Configuring Advanced Features Enter the callee’s number in the Dial Number field. Click Dial to dial out the number. The web user interface prompts “Call Success” and the phone will automatically dial out the number. You can click Hang Up to end the call. If it is the first time you place a call via web user interface, the LCD screen will prompt the message “Allow remote control?”.
  • Page 728 Working Server: Server 1 is configured with the domain name of the working server. For example: yealink.pbx.com. DNS mechanism is used such that the working server is resolved to multiple servers with different IP addresses for failover purpose. The working server is deployed in redundant pairs, designated as primary and secondary servers.

  • Page 729: Phone Registration

    In a failure situation, the IP phone registers to the fallback server, and the fallback server can take over all calling capabilities. Server Redundancy on Yealink IP Phones. For more information on server redundancy, refer to Procedure Server redundancy can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 730 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configure the outbound proxy server redundancy. Parameters: account.X.outbound_proxy_enable account.X.outbound_proxy.Y.address account.X.outbound_proxy.Y.port Fallback Mode Parameters: account.X.fallback.redundancy_type account.X.fallback.timeout account.X.outbound_proxy_fallback_interval Failover Mode Parameters: account.X.sip_server.Y.register_on_enable account.X.sip_server.Y.only_signal_with_registered account.X.sip_server.Y.invite_retry_counts account.X.sip_server.Y.failback_mode account.X.sip_server.Y.failback_timeout account.X.sip_server.Y.failback_subscribe.enable Configure the server redundancy on the IP phone.
  • Page 731 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Example: account.1.sip_server.1.address = yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: Account->Register->SIP Server Y->Server Host Phone User Interface: None account.X.sip_server.Y.port Integer from 0 to 5060 65535 (X ranges from 1 to 16, Y ranges from 1 to 2) Description: Configures the port of the SIP server Y that specifies registrations for account X.
  • Page 732 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Example: account.1.sip_server.1.expires = 3600 Web User Interface: Account->Register->SIP Server Y->Server Expires Phone User Interface: None account.X.sip_server.Y.retry_counts Integer from 0 to...
  • Page 733 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default information. So the IP phone will directly send the requests to the secondary server. If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will register to the secondary server first, and then send the requests to it.
  • Page 734 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the number of retries attempted before sending requests to the next available server for account X when encountering a failover. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G)
  • Page 735 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the IP address or domain name of the outbound proxy server Y for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2)
  • Page 736 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Concurrent Registration 1-Successive Registration X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 737 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the time interval (in seconds) for the IP phone to detect whether the working outbound proxy server is available by sending the registration request after the fallback server takes over call control. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 738 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Note: DNSTTL, Registration and duration mode can only be processed when the IP phone is idle (that is, no incoming/outbound calls, no active calls or meetings, etc.).
  • Page 739 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will immediately re-subscribe to the secondary server, for ensuring the normal use of the features associated with subscription (e.g., BLF, SCA). X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 740 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configure parameters of outbound proxy server 1 and outbound proxy server 2 in the corresponding fields. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure server redundancy for failover purpose via web user interface: Click on Account->Register.

  • Page 741: Server Domain Name Resolution

    A query. If no port is found through the DNS query, 5060 will be used. The following details the procedures of DNS query for the IP phone to resolve the domain name (e.g., yealink.pbx.com) of working server into the IP address, port and transport protocol. NAPTR (Naming Authority Pointer) First, the IP phone sends NAPTR query to get the NAPTR pointer and transport protocol.
  • Page 742 SRV query next. TCP will be used, targeted to a host determined by an SRV query of “_sip._tcp.yealink.pbx.com”. If the flag of the NAPTR record returned is empty, the IP phone will perform NAPTR query again according to the previous NAPTR query result.
  • Page 743 The two records also contain a port “5060”, the IP phone uses this port. If the Target is not a numeric IP address, the IP phone performs an A query. So in this case, the IP phone uses “server1.yealink.pbx.com" and “server2.yealink.pbx.com" for the A query. A (Host IP Address) The IP phone performs an A query for the IP address of each target host name.
  • Page 744 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-UDP 1-TCP 2-TLS 3-DNS-NAPTR If the value of this parameter is set to 3 (DNS-NAPTR), the value of the parameter “account.X.sip_server.Y.address” is set to a host name and the value of the parameter “account.X.sip_server.Y.port”...

  • Page 745: Static Dns Cache

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None Phone User Interface: None Static DNS Cache Failover redundancy can only be utilized when the configured domain name of the server is resolved to multiple IP addresses. If the IP phone is not configured with a DNS server, or the DNS query returns no result from a DNS server, you can statically configure a set of DNS NAPTR/SRV/A records into the IP phone.
  • Page 746 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure Static DNS cache can be configured only using the configuration files. Configure NAPTR/SRV/A records. Parameters: dns_cache_naptr.X.name dns_cache_naptr.X.flags dns_cache_naptr.X.order dns_cache_naptr.X.preference dns_cache_naptr.X.replace dns_cache_naptr.X.service dns_cache_naptr.X.ttl <y0000000000xx>.cfg dns_cache_srv.X.name dns_cache_srv.X.port dns_cache_srv.X.priority dns_cache_srv.X.target Central Provisioning dns_cache_srv.X.weight (Configuration File) dns_cache_srv.X.ttl...
  • Page 747 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the domain name to which NAPTR record X refers. Example: dns_cache_naptr.1.name = yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_naptr.X.flags S, A, U or P Blank (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the flag of NAPTR record X.
  • Page 748 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_naptr.X.preference Integer from 0 to 65535 (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the preference of NAPTR record X. NAPTR record with lower value is more preferred when the multiple NAPTR records have the same order value.
  • Page 749 Domain name with SRV Blank prefix (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the domain name in SRV record X. Example: dns_cache_srv.1.name = _sip._tcp.yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_srv.X.port Integer from 0 to 65535 (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the port to be used in SRV record X.
  • Page 750 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default dns_cache_srv.1.port = 5060 Note: For more information, refer to 2782. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_srv.X.priority Integer from 0 to 65535 (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the priority for the target host in SRV record X.
  • Page 751 None dns_cache_a.X.name Domain name Blank (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the domain name in A record X. Example: dns_cache_a.1.name = yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_a.X.ip IP address Blank (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the IP address that the domain name in A record X maps to.
  • Page 752 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: dns_cache_a.1.ip = 192.168.1.13 Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_a.X.ttl Integer from 30 to 2147483647 (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the time interval (in seconds) that A record X may be cached before the record should be consulted again.

  • Page 753: Real-Time Transport Protocol (Rtp) Ports

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None Phone User Interface: None account.X.static_cache_pri 0 or 1 Description: Configures whether preferentially to use the static DNS cache for domain name resolution of the server for account X. 0-Use domain name resolution from the DNS server preferentially 1-Use static DNS cache preferentially X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S)
  • Page 754 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure RTP ports can be configured using the following methods. Configure RTP ports. Central Provisioning Parameters: <y0000000000xx>.cfg static.network.port.max_rtpport (Configuration File) static.network.port.min_rtpport Configure RTP ports. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =network-adv&q=load...

  • Page 755: Tr-069 Device Management

    Configuring Advanced Features To configure the minimum and maximum RTP port via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced. In the Local RTP Port block, enter the max and min RTP port in the Max RTP Port(1~65535) and Min RTP Port(1~65535) field respectively. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 756 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones The following table provides a description of RPC methods supported by IP phones. RPC Method Description This method is used to discover the set of methods GetRPCMethods supported by the CPE.
  • Page 757 Configuring Advanced Features Yealink TR-069 Technote For more information on TR-069, refer to Procedure TR-069 can be configured using the following methods. Configure TR-069 feature. Parameters: static.managementserver.enable static.managementserver.username Central static.managementserver.password Provisioning <y000000000 0xx>.cfg static.managementserver.url (Configuratio n File) static.managementserver.connection_request_username static.managementserver.connection_request_password static.managementserver.periodic_inform_enable static.managementserver.periodic_inform_interval...
  • Page 758 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Configures the user name for the IP phone to authenticate with the ACS (Auto Configuration Servers). Leave it blank if no authentication is required. Example: static.managementserver.username = tr69 Web User Interface: Settings->TR069->ACS Username...
  • Page 759 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values String static.managementserver.connection_request_username within 128 Blank characters Description: Configures the user name for the IP phone to authenticate the incoming connection requests of the ACS (Auto Configuration Servers). Example: static.managementserver.connection_request_username = accuser Web User Interface: Settings->TR069->Connection Request Username Phone User Interface: None...
  • Page 760 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values None Integer from 5 to static.managementserver.periodic_inform_interval 429496729 Description: Configures the interval (in seconds) for the IP phone to report its configuration to the ACS (Auto Configuration Servers).

  • Page 761: Xml Browser

    Google search, news service, etc. To use the XML browser feature, you must configure an XML key in advance. Yealink IP Phones XML Browser Developer's For more information on XML browser, refer to...
  • Page 762 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=dss key&q=load&model=0 Assign an XML browser key. Phone User Interface XML Browser Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 948.
  • Page 763 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default For line keys: For SIP-T48G/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-29 is 0. For SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-27 is 0. For SIP-T42G/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-12 is 15, and the default value of the line key 13-15 is 0.
  • Page 764 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=7, the default value is 51 (Switch Account Up). When X=8, the default value is 52 (Switch Account Down). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status).
  • Page 765 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu). When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=8, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 766 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X=1-10, 14 (for SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2) X=1-9, 13, 14 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) For ext keys: For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40.

  • Page 767: Enhanced Dss Keys

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label To configure an XML Browser key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key (or Programable Key). In the desired DSS key field, select XML Browser from the pull-down list of Type. the available access URL in the Value field.

  • Page 768: Some Guidelines For Configuring Enhanced Dss Keys

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Using Enhanced DSS Keys on Yealink IP For more information on Enhanced DSS Keys, refer to Phones The following guidelines will help you to configure EDK efficiently: Activation of EDK functions requires valid macro construction.
  • Page 769 The softkey ID is case-insensitive. Example: $Sanswer$ means pressing the Answer soft key. $S<softkey ID>$ Yealink IP phones support customizing soft keys. When invoking a custom soft key, the prefix “#” must be added. Example: If the custom softkey label is IVR1, the custom softkey id is custom_macro, then $S#custom_macro$ means pressing the IVR1 soft key.
  • Page 770 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Macro Action Description VolDown  VolUp  Cancel   DialPadX (X ranges from 0 to 9)  DialPadPound  DialPadStar  Headset  Mute  Message  Hold  Redial ...
  • Page 771 Configuring Advanced Features Macro Action Description on the current screen, the execution of the action string will be ignored. The menu item ID is case-insensitive. Example: $Istatus_list& means entering the Status menu. Note: To view the menu item ID, you can configure the value of the parameter “edk.id_mode.enable”...

  • Page 772: Configuring Edk Feature

    By default, the EDK feature is disabled. Yealink IP phones support displaying the softkey id or menu item id by long pressing the Volume Up key. It is especially useful for those users who need to view the softkey id or menu...
  • Page 773 Configuring Advanced Features item id when configuring EDK macros. The following graphic shows an example for displaying the softkey id and menu item id after accessing the menu of the phone: Procedure EDK feature can be configured using the configuration files. Configure enhanced DSS keys.

  • Page 774: Configuring Edk List

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default edk.id_mode.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables to view the softkey id or menu item id by long pressing the Volume Up key. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), you can view the softkey id or menu item id by long pressing the Volume Up key for three seconds at any interface.
  • Page 775 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Enables or disables Enhanced DSS Keys (EDK) macro X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None edk.edklist.X.mname String...

  • Page 776: Configuring Edk Prompt

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None Phone User Interface: None The Enhanced DSS Keys (EDK) Prompt parameters must be used if interactivity with user is implemented as part of any macro. Procedure EDK prompt can be configured using the configuration files.
  • Page 777 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Configures the prompt text to be displayed on the Enhanced DSS Keys (EDK) prompt X screen. If it is left blank, no prompt displays. Example: edk.edkprompt.1.label = Enter Password Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable”...

  • Page 778: Configuring Edk Soft Keys

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default If it is set to visible, the entered text is visible. If it is set to masked, the entered text displays as asterisk characters (*). It can be used to mask password fields.
  • Page 779 Configuring Advanced Features Dial tone – There is a dial tone you can hear on the phone.  Dialing – The phone is on the dialing screen.  Configuring the custom soft keys may affect the softkey layout in different states. For more information, refer to Softkey Layout on page 264.
  • Page 780 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None softkey.X.label String Blank...
  • Page 781 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default softkey.X.action String Blank (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Configures the action or function for custom soft key X. This value uses the same macro action string syntax as an Enhanced DSS key. You can also invoke the EDK macro that was already defined.
  • Page 782 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the idle state. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable”...
  • Page 783 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default softkey.X.use.transfer_connecting 0 or 1 (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the transfer connecting state. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” and “softkey.X.enable”...
  • Page 784 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None softkey.X.use.ring_back 0 or 1 (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the ring back state.
  • Page 785 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default and “softkey.X.enable” are set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None softkey.X.use.held 0 or 1 (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the held state. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable”...

  • Page 786: Configuring A Custom Key

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default entered) state. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” and “softkey.X.enable” are set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None softkey.X.use.dialing...
  • Page 787 Configuring Advanced Features expansion_module.X.key.Y.value linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Assign a custom key. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=dss key&q=load&model=0 Assign a custom key. Phone User Interface Custom Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 948.
  • Page 788 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured). Example: linekey.2.type = 73...
  • Page 789 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu). When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 51 (Switch Account Up).
  • Page 790 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=10, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History).
  • Page 791 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys: X=1-10, 12-14 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S) X=1-10, 13 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G)
  • Page 792 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys: X ranges from 1 to 4.

  • Page 793: Example Macros

    Configuring Advanced Features Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Macros can be applied to various scenarios. The following takes an example to help you understand how to execute the macro action string. Scenario Operations: Add/Edit the following parameters in the y000000000028.cfg file or <MAC>.cfg (e.g., 001565770984.cfg) file you want the IP phone to download: features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable = 1 edk.edklist.1.enable = 1...
  • Page 794 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones The Custom Key displays on the phone: Press the Custom Key when the phone is idle. The action string 1013$Tinvite$$Cwc$$Cp10$$Penter number&C4&N$$Tdtmf$$Cp3$$Chu$ is executed in order as follows: A prompt displays on the LCD screen.

  • Page 795: Configuring Audio Features

    Configuring Audio Features Configuring Audio Features This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following audio features: Redial Tone  Ring Tones  Distinctive Ring Tones  Tones  Voice Mail Tone  Ringer Device for Headset  Handset/Headset/Speakerphone Mode ...

  • Page 796: Ring Tones

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.redial_tone Integer within 6 digits Blank Description: Configures the IP phone to continue to play the dial tone after inputting the preset numbers on the dialing screen.
  • Page 797 Configuring Audio Features The ring tone format must meet the following: Phone Model Format Single File Size Total File Size <=8MB (2MB of space should SIP-T48S/T46S/T42S/T41S/T27G .wav <=8MB be reserved for the phone) SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G .wav <=8MB <=20MB SIP-T42G/T41P/T40P/T40G/T27P .wav <=100KB <=100KB /T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2 The ring tone file must be PCMU audio format, mono channel, 8K sample rate and 16 bit...
  • Page 798 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configure a ring tone on a per-line basis. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=accou nt-basic&q=load&acc=0 Configure a ring tone for the IP phone. Phone User Interface Configure a ring tone for the account. Details of the Configuration Parameters:...
  • Page 799 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Web User Interface: Account->Basic->Ring Type...
  • Page 800 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Click Upload to upload the file. The custom ring tone appears in the pull-down list of Ring Type. To change the ring tone for the phone via web user interface: Click on Settings->Preference.

  • Page 801: Distinctive Ring Tones

    Configuring Audio Features If Common is selected, this account will use the ring tone selected for the phone. Click Confirm to accept the change. To select a ring tone for the phone via phone user interface: Press Menu->Basic->Sound->Ring Tones->Common. Press to select the desired ring tone.
  • Page 802 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Alert-Info: <URL> Alert-Info: info=info text;x-line-id=0 1) Alert-Info: Bellcore-drN When the Alter-Info header contains the keyword “Bellcore-drN”, the IP phone will play the desired ring tone. The following table identifies the corresponding ring tone:...
  • Page 803 Configuring Audio Features The following table identifies the different Bellcore ring tone patterns and cadences (These ring tones are designed for the BroadWorks server). Minimum Nominal Maximum Pattern Cade Bellcore Tone Pattern Duration Duration Duration (ms) (ms) (ms) Ringing 1800 2000 2200 Bellcore-dr1(sta...
  • Page 804 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Alert-Info: <http://10.1.0.31>;info=ringtone-2 Alert-Info: <http://127.0.0.1/ringtone-2> Alert-Info: MyMelody2 Alert-Info: MyMelody2;x-line-id=1 Alert-Info: <http://10.1.0.31>;x-line-id=0;info=MyMelody2 The following table identifies the corresponding local ring tone: Value of N Ring Tone Ring1.wav Ring2.wav Ring3.wav Ring4.wav Ring5.wav Ring6.wav Ring7.wav Ring8.wav...
  • Page 805 Configuring Audio Features Text (the ring tone can be configured by the parameter “distinctive_ring_tones.alert_info.X.ringer”). If no internal ringer text maps, the IP phone will play the preconfigured local ring tone in about 10 seconds. Example: Alert-Info: info=family;x-line-id=0 Alert-Info: <http://10.1.0.31>;info=family Alert-Info: <http://10.1.0.31>;info=family;x-line-id=0 Auto Answer If the INVITE request contains the following type of strings, the IP phone will answer incoming calls automatically without playing the ring tone:...
  • Page 806 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configure the internal ringer text and internal ringer file. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=mod_ data&p=settings-ring&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.alert_info_url_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to download the ring tone from the URL contained in the Alert-Info header for account X.
  • Page 807 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default distinctive_ring_tones.alert_info.X.text String within 32 characters Blank (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Configures the internal ringer text to map the keywords contained in the Alert-Info header. Example: distinctive_ring_tones.alert_info.1.text = Family Web User Interface: Settings->Ring->Internal Ringer Text Phone User Interface: None...

  • Page 808: Tones

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Distinctive Ring Tones. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the internal ringer text and internal ringer file via web user interface: Click on Settings->Ring.
  • Page 809 Configuring Audio Features IP phone. The default tones used on IP phones are the US tone sets. Available tone sets for IP phones: Australia  Austria  Brazil  Belgium  China  Czech  Denmark  Finland  France ...
  • Page 810 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Condition Description Map String Rules) Ring Back Ring-back tone Busy When the callee is busy Congestion When the network is congested Call waiting tone (For more information on call Call Waiting...
  • Page 811 Configuring Audio Features Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? p=settings-tones&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default voice.tone.country Refer to the following content Custom Description: Configures the country tone for the IP phone. Permitted Values: Custom, Australia, Austria, Brazil, Belgium, Chile, China, Czech, Czech ETSI, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Great Britain, Greece, Hungary, Lithuania, India, Italy, Japan, Mexico, New Zealand, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Switzerland, Sweden, Russia, United States.
  • Page 812 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default (e.g., !250/200,0/1000,200+300/500,200+500+800+1500/1000). Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.tone.country” is set to Custom. If you want to disable this warning tone, set it to 0.
  • Page 813 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default The value format is Freq/Duration. For more information on the value format, refer to the parameter “voice.tone.dial”. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.tone.country” is set to Custom. If you want to disable this warning tone, set it to 0.
  • Page 814 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Customizes the call back tone. The value format is Freq/Duration. For more information on the value format, refer to the parameter “voice.tone.dial”. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.tone.country” is set to Custom. If you want to disable this warning tone, set it to 0.
  • Page 815 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default voice.tone.message String Blank Description: Customizes the tone when the IP phone receives a text message. The value format is Freq/Duration. For more information on the value format, refer to the parameter “voice.tone.dial”. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.tone.country” is set to Custom. If you want to disable this warning tone, set it to 0.

  • Page 816: Voice Mail Tone

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones If you select Custom, you can customize a tone for each condition of the IP phone. Click Confirm to accept the change. Voice Mail Tone Voice mail tone feature allows the IP phone to play a warning tone when receiving a new voice mail.

  • Page 817: Ringer Device For Headset

    Bluetooth headset) should be connected to the IP phone and the headset mode also should be activated in advance. You can press the HEADSET key to activate the headset mode. For more Yealink phone-specific user guide information, refer to the...
  • Page 818 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Procedure Ringer device for headset can be configured using the following methods. Configure the ringer device for the IP phone. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) features.ringer_device.is_use_headset Configure the ringer device for the IP phone.

  • Page 819: Handset/Headset/Speakerphone Mode

    Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Ringer Device for Headset. Click Confirm to accept the change. Handset/Headset/Speakerphone Mode Yealink IP phones support three ways to place/answer a call: using the handset, using the headset or using the speakerphone. You can disable the least frequently used audio device as required.

  • Page 820: Headset Prior

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None features.handset_mode.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone’s handset. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: None...
  • Page 821 Configuring Audio Features Procedure Headset prior can be configured using the following methods. Configure headset prior. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) features.headset_prior Configure headset prior. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl et?p=features-general&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.headset_prior 0 or 1...

  • Page 822: Dual Headset

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Headset Prior. Click Confirm to accept the change. Dual Headset Dual headset allows users to use two headsets on one IP phone. To use this feature, users need to physically connect two headsets to the headset and handset jacks respectively.
  • Page 823 Configuring Audio Features Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.headset_training 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables dual headset feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), users can use two headsets on one phone. When the IP phone joins in a call, the users with the headset connected to the headset jack have a full-duplex conversation, while the users with the headset connected to the handset jack are only allowed to listen to.

  • Page 824: Sending Volume

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Sending Volume Sending volume allows user to adjust the sending volume of currently engaged audio devices (handset, speakerphone or headset) when the phone is in use. Procedure Sending volume can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 825 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None voice.handset_send Integer from -50 to 50 Description: Configures the sending volume of the handset. Note: We recommend that you modify this parameter cautiously. An unreasonable value may render the voice quality bad. If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.

  • Page 826: Audio Codecs

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Enter the desired value in the Handfree Send Volume (-50~50) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.
  • Page 827 Configuring Audio Features The Opus codec supports various audio bandwidths, defined as follows: Abbreviation Audio Bandwidth Sample Rate (Effective) NB (narrowband) 4 kHz 8 kHz MB (medium-band) 6 kHz 12 kHz WB (wideband) 8 kHz 16 kHz SWB (super-wideband) 12 kHz 24 kHz FB (fullband) 20 kHz...
  • Page 828 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Codecs and priorities of these codecs are configurable on a per-line basis. The attribute “rtpmap” is used to define a mapping from RTP payload codes to a codec, clock rate and other encoding parameters.
  • Page 829 Web User Interface G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2) Audio Codec Configuration Yealink IP phones running firmware version 81 or later support a new configuration behavior for the audio codecs. It is more efficiently for you to provision a number of different IP phone modules.
  • Page 830 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values account.X.codec.<payload_type>.enable Refer to the 0 or 1 (where <payload_type> should be replaced by following content the name of audio codec) Description: Enables or disables the specified audio codec for account X.
  • Page 831 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Example: For SIP-T48S/T46S/T42S/T41S: account.1.codec.g722.enable = 1 account.1.codec.pcmu.enable = 1 account.1.codec.pcma.enable = 1 account.1.codec.g729.enable = 1 account.1.codec.g726_16.enable = 0 account.1.codec.g726_24.enable = 0 account.1.codec.g726_32.enable = 0 account.1.codec.g726_40.enable = 0 account.1.codec.ilbc.enable = 0 account.1.codec.g723_53.enable = 0 account.1.codec.g723_63.enable = 0 It means that the codecs G722, PCMU, PCMA and G729 are enabled on the account 1.
  • Page 832 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values For SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2: G722, PCMA, PCMU, G729, G726-16, G726-24, G726-32, G726-40, iLBC, opus For SIP-T27P/T27G: G722, PCMA, PCMU, G729, G726-16, G726-24, G726-32, G726-40, iLBC Default: When audio codec is G722, the default value is 1;...
  • Page 833 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Account->Codec->Audio Codec Phone User Interface: None account.X.codec.<payload_type>.rtpmap Integer Refer to the (where <payload_type> should be replaced by following content from 0 to 127 the name of audio codec) Description: Configures the rtpmap of the audio codec for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 834 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values above example, otherwise the corresponding configuration will not take effect. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None To configure the codecs to use and adjust the priority of the enabled codecs via web user interface: Click on Account->Codec.
  • Page 835 Configuring Audio Features Old Configuration Behavior Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods. Configure the codecs to use on a per-line basis. Parameters: account.X.codec.Y.enable account.X.codec.Y.payload_type Central Provisioning <MAC>.cfg (Configuration File) Configure the priority and rtpmap for the enabled codec. Parameters: account.X.codec.Y.priority account.X.codec.Y.rtpmap...
  • Page 836 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Y ranges from 1 to 11 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T29G) Y ranges from 1 to 10 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2) Y ranges from 1 to 9 (for SIP-T27P/T27G)
  • Page 837 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values When Y=7, the default value is 0; When Y=8, the default value is 0; When Y=9, the default value is 0; Example: account.1.codec.1.enable = 1 It means that the audio codec PCMU is enabled on the account 1. Note: It is only applicable to the IP phones running firmware version 81 or prior.
  • Page 838 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values When Y=6, the default value is G722; When Y=7, the default value is iLBC; When Y=8, the default value is G726-16; When Y=9, the default value is G726-24;...
  • Page 839 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values account.X.codec.Y.priority Integer from 0 Refer to the to 11 following content (X ranges from 1 to 16, Y ranges from 1 to 11) Description: Configures the priority of the enabled audio codec for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 840 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values When Y=9, the default value is 0; When Y=10, the default value is 0; For SIP-T27P/T27G: When Y=1, the default value is 2; When Y=2, the default value is 3;...
  • Page 841 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T29G: When Y=1, the default value is 0; When Y=2, the default value is 8; When Y=3, the default value is 4; When Y=4, the default value is 4; When Y=5, the default value is 18; When Y=6, the default value is 9;...

  • Page 842: Packetization Time (Ptime)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Note: It is only applicable to the IP phones running firmware version 81 or prior. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None The configuration of audio codecs via web user interface for old configuration behavior is the same as the newer one.
  • Page 843 Configuring Audio Features Packetization Time Codec Packetization Time (Maximun) (Minimun) opus 10ms 20ms Procedure PTime can be configured using the following methods. Configure the ptime. Central Provisioning <MAC>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) account.X.ptime Configure the ptime. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p= account-adv&q=load&acc=0 Details of Configuration Parameter:...

  • Page 844: Acoustic Clarity Technology

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default account.1.ptime = 20 Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->PTime(ms) Phone User Interface: None To configure the ptime for the account via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
  • Page 845 Configuring Audio Features certain situation, where echo is experienced by the remote party, AEC may be used to reduce/avoid echo when the user uses the handset. Utilizing acoustic echo cancellation will introduce a small delay increase into audio path which Note might cause a lower voice quality.

  • Page 846: Background Noise Suppression (Bns)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of ECHO. Click Confirm to accept the change. Background noise suppression (BNS) is designed primarily for hands-free operation and reduces background noise to enhance communication in noisy environments.

  • Page 847: Comfort Noise Generation (Cng)

    Configuring Audio Features Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =settings-voice&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default voice.vad 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the VAD (Voice Activity Detection) feature on the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Settings->Voice->Echo Cancellation->VAD Phone User Interface: None To configure VAD via web user interface:...
  • Page 848 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones resumes. The insertion of artificial noise gives the illusion of a constant transmission stream, so that background sound is consistent throughout the call and the listener does not think the line has released.

  • Page 849: Jitter Buffer

    Configuring Audio Features Parameter Permitted Values Default None To configure CNG via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of CNG. Click Confirm to accept the change. Jitter buffer is a shared data area where voice packets can be collected, stored, and sent to the voice processor in even intervals.
  • Page 850 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones voice.jib.max voice.jib.normal Configure the mode of jitter buffer and the delay time for jitter buffer in the wireless network. Parameters: voice.wifi_jib.adaptive voice.wifi_jib.min voice.wifi_jib.max voice.wifi_jib.normal Configure the mode of jitter buffer and the delay time for jitter buffer in the wired network.
  • Page 851 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None voice.jib.max Integer from 0 to 400 Description: Configures the maximum delay time (in milliseconds) of jitter buffer in the wired network. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.jib.adaptive” is set to 1 (Adaptive). Web User Interface: Settings->Voice->JITTER BUFFER->Max Delay Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 852 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the minimum delay time (in milliseconds) of jitter buffer in the wireless network. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.jib.wifi.adaptive” is set to 1 (Adaptive).

  • Page 853: Dtmf

    Configuring Audio Features Enter the minimum delay time for adaptive jitter buffer in the Min Delay field. The valid value ranges from 20 to 300. Enter the maximum delay time for adaptive jitter buffer in the Max Delay field. The valid value ranges from 20 to 300. Enter the fixed delay time for fixed jitter buffer in the Normal field.

  • Page 854: Methods Of Transmitting Dtmf Digit

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Three methods of transmitting DTMF digits on SIP calls: RFC 2833 -- DTMF digits are transmitted by RTP Events compliant to RFC 2833.  INBAND -- DTMF digits are transmitted in the voice band.
  • Page 855 Configuring Audio Features Configure the number of times for the IP phone to send the end RTP Event packet. Parameter: features.dtmf.repetition Specify how long the phone should play each DTMF tone for. Parameter: features.dtmf.duration <y0000000000xx>.c Configure the frequency level of DTMF digits.
  • Page 856 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 3-RFC2833 + SIP INFO If it is set to 0 (INBAND), DTMF digits are transmitted in the voice band. If it is set to 1 (RFC 2833), DTMF digits are transmitted by RTP Events compliant to RFC 2833.
  • Page 857 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the DTMF info type. 1-DTMF-Relay 2-DTMF 3-Telephone-Event X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.dtmf.type”...
  • Page 858 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None Integer from -33 features.dtmf.volume to 0 Description: Configures the frequency level of DTMF digits (in db). Web User Interface:...

  • Page 859: Suppress Dtmf Display

    Configuring Audio Features Enter the desired value in the DTMF Payload Type(96~127) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the number of times to send the end RTP Event packet via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value (1-3) from the pull-down list of DTMF Repetition.
  • Page 860 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones suppress DTMF display delay. (Configuration File) Parameters: features.dtmf.hide features.dtmf.hide_delay Configure suppress DTMF display and suppress DTMF display delay. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=f eatures-general&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.dtmf.hide...

  • Page 861: Transfer Via Dtmf

    Configuring Audio Features To configure suppress DTMF display and suppress DTMF display delay via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Suppress DTMF Display. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Suppress DTMF Display Delay. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 862 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.dtmf.replace_tran 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to send DTMF sequences for transfer function when pressing the Tran/Transfer soft key or TRAN/TRANSFER key.

  • Page 863: Dtmf Send Event Flash

    Configuring Audio Features Enter the specified DTMF digits in the Tran Send DTMF field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Generally, the IP phones support 16 encoded DTMF signals (0 to 15), represented by the ten digits, the letters A to D, and the symbols # and *. DTMF send event flash feature allows IP phones to send Event Flash (DTMF signal 16) by transforming the letter E.
  • Page 864 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones The following figure shows the Flash event sent by the IP phone when transmitting DTMF digit using the RFC 2833 DTMF type: Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files.

  • Page 865: Play Local Dtmf Tone

    Configuring Audio Features Play local DTMF tone allows IP phones to play a local DTMF tone during an active call. If this feature is enabled, you can hear the DTMF tone when pressing the IP phone’s keypad during a call. Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods.

  • Page 866: Voice Quality Monitoring (Vqm)

    These metrics can be sent between the phones in RTCP-XR packets. These metrics can also be sent in SIP PUBLISH messages to a central voice quality report collector. Two mechanisms for voice quality monitoring are supported by Yealink IP phones: RTCP-XR ...
  • Page 867 Configuring Audio Features Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=set tings-voicemonitoring&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default voice.rtcp_xr.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to send RTCP-XR packets. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.

  • Page 868: Vq-Rtcpxr

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Click OK to reboot the phone. The VQ-RTCPXR mechanism, compliant with 6035, sends the service quality metric reports contained in SIP PUBLISH messages to the central report collector. Three types of quality reports can be enabled: Session: Generated at the end of a call.
  • Page 869 Configuring Audio Features Configure the generation of alert packets. Parameters: phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_moslq_threshold_warning phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_moslq_threshold_critical phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_delay_threshold_warning phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_delay_threshold_critical Configure the phone to display RTP status showing the voice quality report of the last call on the web user interface. Parameter: phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_web.enable Configure the phone to display RTP status showing the voice quality report of the last call or the current call on the phone user interface.
  • Page 870 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configure the central report collector. Parameters: <MAC>.cfg account.X.vq_rtcpxr.collector_name account.X.vq_rtcpxr.collector_server_host account.X.vq_rtcpxr.collector_server_port Configure VQ-RTCPXR. Configure the phone to display RTP status showing the voice quality report of the last call on the web user interface.
  • Page 871 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to send an interval quality report to the central report collector periodically throughout a call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: To avoid overload, the interval quality reports only generate when the call is abnormal.
  • Page 872 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Web User Interface: Settings->Voice Monitoring->Warning threshold for Moslq Phone User Interface: None 15 to 40 Blank phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_moslq_threshold_critical Description: Configures the threshold value of listening MOS score (MOS-LQ) multiplied by 10. The threshold value of MOS-LQ causes the phone to send a critical alert quality report to the central report collector.
  • Page 873 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_delay_threshold_critical 10 to 2000 Blank Description: Configures the threshold value of one way delay (in milliseconds) that causes phone to send a critical alert quality report to the central report collector. For example, If it is set to 500, when the value of one way delay computed by the phone is greater than or equal to 500, the phone will send a critical alert quality report to the central report collector;...
  • Page 874 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Settings->Voice Monitoring->Display Report options on phone Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_start_time.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone to display Start Time on the LCD screen.
  • Page 875 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Web User Interface: Settings->Voice Monitoring->Report options on phone->Local User Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_remote_call_id.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone to display Remote User on the LCD screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable”...
  • Page 876 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Settings->Voice Monitoring->Report options on phone->Remote Codec Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_jitter.enable...
  • Page 877 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Description: Enables or disables the phone to display Packets Lost on the LCD screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Settings->Voice Monitoring->Report options on phone->Packets Lost Phone User Interface: None...
  • Page 878 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_moslq.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone to display MOS-LQ on the LCD screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable”...
  • Page 879 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->VQ RTCP-XR Collector Name Phone User Interface: None IPv4 account.X.vq_rtcpxr.collector_server_host Blank Address Description: Configures the IP address of the central report collector that accepts voice quality reports contained in SIP PUBLISH messages for account X.
  • Page 880 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Phone User Interface: None To configure session report for VQ-RTCPXR via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice Monitoring. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of VQ RTCP-XR Session Report.
  • Page 881 Configuring Audio Features Enter the desired value in the Period for Interval Report field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure alert report for VQ-RTCPXR via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice Monitoring. Enter the desired value in the Warning threshold for Moslq field. Enter the desired value in the Critical threshold for Moslq field.
  • Page 882 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Display Report options on Web. Click Confirm to accept the change. The RTP status will appear on the web user interface at the path: Status->RTP Status.
  • Page 883 Configuring Audio Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Display Report options on phone. Click Confirm to accept the change. The RTP status will appear on the phone user interface at the path: Menu->Status->More…. To configure the options of the RTP status displayed on the LCD screen via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice Monitoring.
  • Page 884 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Repeat the step 2 to add more items to the Enabled column. To remove an item from the Enabled column, select the desired item and then click To adjust the display order of enabled items, select the desired item and then click The LCD screen will display the item(s) in the adjusted order.

  • Page 885: Configuring Security Features

    Configuring Security Features Configuring Security Features This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following security-related features: User and Administrator Passwords  Auto Logout Time  Phone Lock  Transport Layer Security (TLS)  Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol (SRTP) ...
  • Page 886 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones of the IP phone. Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default static.security.user_password String within 32 characters user Description: Configures the password of the user or administrator for phone’s web user interface access.

  • Page 887: Auto Logout Time

    Configuring Security Features Click Confirm to accept the change. If logging into the web user interface of the phone with the user credential, you need to enter the Note old user password in the Old Password field. To change the administrator password via phone user interface: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Change Password.

  • Page 888: Phone Lock

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Auto Logout Time(1~1000min) Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 889 Configuring Security Features Procedure Phone lock can be configured using the following methods. Configure the phone lock type. Parameters: phone_setting.phone_lock.enable phone_setting.phone_lock.lock_key_type Change the unlock PIN. Parameter: phone_setting.phone_lock.unlock_pin Configure the IP phone to automatically lock the phone after a time interval. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.c...
  • Page 890 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configure the IP phone to automatically lock the phone after a time interval. Assign a phone lock key. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting.phone_lock.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone lock feature.
  • Page 891 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the password for unlocking the phone. Web User Interface: Features->Phone Lock->Phone Unlock PIN(0~15 Digit) Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Change PIN phone_setting.phone_lock.lock_time_out Integer from 0 to 3600 Description: Configures the maximum time (in seconds) the IP phone can be idle before it is automatically locked.
  • Page 892 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Features->Phone Lock->Emergency Phone User Interface: None Phone Lock Type The following table lists the operation behavior when configuring the type of phone lock: All Keys Function Keys...

  • Page 893: Phone Lock Key

    Configuring Security Features All Keys Function Keys Menu key type is Line), digit keys, X, Volume key, HEADSET key, Speakerphone key. Note: Pressing X key to end the call are not applicable to SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2 IP phones. Phone Lock Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 948.
  • Page 894 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured). Example: linekey.1.type = 50 Default: For line keys: For SIP-T48G/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-29 is 0.
  • Page 895 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu). When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 51 (Switch Account Up). When X=8, the default value is 52 (Switch Account Down).
  • Page 896 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory).
  • Page 897 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured). Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key/Programable Key->Label Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label To configure phone lock via web user interface: Click on Features->Phone Lock.

  • Page 898: Transport Layer Security (Tls)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones To configure the type of phone lock via phone user interface: Press Menu->Basic->Phone Lock. Enter the unlock PIN (default PIN: 123) in the Unlock PIN field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Lock Enable field.
  • Page 899 Configuring Security Features is the same as the decryption key. Asymmetric encryption: For asymmetric encryption, each user has a pair of cryptographic  keys – a public encryption key and a private decryption key. The information encrypted by the public key can only be decrypted by the corresponding private key and vice versa. Usually, the receiver keeps its private key.
  • Page 900 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones EXP-DES-CBC-SHA  EXP-RC2-CBC-MD5  EXP-RC4-MD5  The following figure illustrates the TLS messages exchanged between the IP phone and TLS server to establish an encrypted communication channel: Step1: IP phone sends “Client Hello” message proposing SSL options.
  • Page 901 A unique server certificate: It is unique to an IP phone (based on the MAC address) and issued by the Yealink Certificate Authority (CA). A generic server certificate: It issued by the Yealink Certificate Authority (CA). Only if no unique certificate exists, the IP phone may send a generic certificate for authentication.
  • Page 902 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Upload the trusted certificates. Parameter: static.trusted_certificates.url Delete all uploaded trusted certificates. Parameter: static.trusted_certificates.delete Upload the server certificates. Parameter: static.server_certificates.url Delete all uploaded server certificates. Parameter: static.server_certificates.delete Configure the custom certificates. Parameter: static.phone_setting.reserve_certs_enable...
  • Page 903 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the transport method the IP phone uses to communicate with the SIP server for account X. 0-UDP 1-TCP 2-TLS 3-DNS-NAPTR X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2)
  • Page 904 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to only trust the server certificates in the Trusted Certificates list. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone will trust the server no matter whether the certificate sent by the server is valid or not.
  • Page 905 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Security->Trusted Certificates->Common Name Validation Phone User Interface: None static.security.dev_cert 0 or 1 Description: Configures the type of the device certificates for the IP phone to send for TLS authentication.
  • Page 906 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default static.trusted_certificates.delete http://localhost/all Blank Description: Deletes all uploaded trusted certificates. Example: static.trusted_certificates.delete = http://localhost/all Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None URL within 511 static.server_certificates.url Blank characters Description: Configures the access URL of the server certificate the IP phone sends for authentication.
  • Page 907 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to reserve custom certificates after it is reset to factory defaults. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None To configure TLS on a per-line basis via web user interface: Click on Account->Register.
  • Page 908 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Select the desired values from the pull-down lists of Only Accept Trusted Certificates, Common Name Validation and CA Certificates. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.

  • Page 909: Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol (Srtp)

    Configuring Security Features To configure the server certificates via web user interface: Click on Security->Server Certificates. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Device Certificates. Click Confirm to accept the change. To upload a server certificate via web user interface: Click on Security->Server Certificates.
  • Page 910 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones a=crypto:2 AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_32 inline:NzkyM2FjNzQ2ZDgxYjg0MzQwMGVmMGUxMzdmNWFm a=crypto:3 F8_128_HMAC_SHA1_80 inline:NDliMWIzZGE1ZTAwZjA5ZGFhNjQ5YmEANTMzYzA0 a=rtpmap:0 PCMU/8000 a=rtpmap:8 PCMA/8000 a=rtpmap:18 G729/8000 a=fmtp:18 annexb=no a=rtpmap:9 G722/8000 a=fmtp:101 0-15 a=rtpmap:101 telephone-event/8000 a=ptime:20 a=sendrecv The callee receives the INVITE message with the RTP encryption algorithm, and then answers the call by responding with a 200 OK message which carries the negotiated RTP encryption algorithm.
  • Page 911 Configuring Security Features Configure SRTP feature on a per-line basis. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? p=account-adv&q=load&acc=0 Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default account.X.srtp_encryption 0, 1 or 2 Description: Configures whether to use voice encryption service for account X. 0-Disabled 1-Optional 2-Compulsory...

  • Page 912: Encrypting And Decrypting Files

    Click Confirm to accept the change. Encrypting and Decrypting Files Yealink IP phones support downloading encrypted files from the server and encrypting files before/when uploading them to the server. You can encrypt the following files: Configuration files: MAC-Oriented CFG file (<MAC>.cfg), Common CFG file ...
  • Page 913 Configuring Security Features Configure the decryption method. Parameter: static.auto_provision.aes_key_in_file Configure AES keys. Parameters: static.auto_provision.aes_key_16.com static.auto_provision.aes_key_16.mac Specify if the contact file is encrypted when it is uploaded from the phone to the server. Parameter: static.auto_provision.encryption.directory Specify if the MAC-local CFG file is encrypted when it is uploaded from the phone to the server.
  • Page 914 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default during auto provisioning, and then resolve these files and update settings onto the IP phone system. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None static.auto_provision.aes_key_in_file 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to decrypt configuration files using the encrypted AES keys.
  • Page 915 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default configured by the parameter “static.auto_provision.aes_key_16.com”. Web User Interface: Settings->Auto Provision->Common AES Key Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Auto Provision->Common static.auto_provision.aes_key_16.mac 16 characters Blank Description: Configures the plaintext AES key for encrypting/decrypting the MAC-Oriented files (<MAC>.cfg, <MAC>-local.cfg and <MAC>-contact.xml).
  • Page 916 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default The plaintext AES key is configured by the parameter “static.auto_provision.aes_key_16.mac”. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None static.auto_provision.encryption.config 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to encrypt <MAC>-local.cfg file using the plaintext AES key.

  • Page 917: Encrypting And Decrypting Configuration Files

    (e.g., login passwords, registration information). Yealink supplies a configuration encryption tool for encrypting configuration files. The encryption tool encrypts plaintext configuration files (e.g., account.cfg, <y0000000000xx>.cfg, <MAC>.cfg) (one by one or in batch) using 16-character symmetric keys (the same or different keys for configuration files) and generates encrypted configuration files with the same file name as before.

  • Page 918: Procedure To Encrypt Configuration Files

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones configuration file. For a Microsoft Windows platform, you can use a Yealink-supplied encryption tool “Config_Encrypt_Tool.exe” to encrypt the configuration files respectively. Yealink also supplies a configuration encryption tool (yealinkencrypt) for Linux platform if...
  • Page 919 Configuring Security Features (Optional.) Click Browse to locate the target directory from your local system in the Target Directory field. The tool uses the file folder “Encrypted” as the target directory by default. (Optional.) Mark the desired radio box in the AES Model field. If you mark the Manual radio box, you can enter an AES key in the AES KEY field or click Re-Generate to generate an AES key in the AES KEY field.

  • Page 920: Encrypting And Decrypting Contact Files

    IP phone system. Incoming Signaling Validation Yealink IP phones support the following three optional levels of security for validating incoming network signaling: Source IP address validation: ensure request is received from an IP address of a server ...
  • Page 921 Configuring Security Features Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default sip.request_validation.source.list A valid string Blank Description: Configures the string used for source IP address validation. It is used to ensure the request is received from the IP address of a SIP server. Example: sip.request_validation.source.list = INVITE, NOTIYF Web User Interface:...
  • Page 922 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default sip.request_validation.digest.event A valid string Blank Description: Configures which events specified within the Event header of SUBSCRIBE or NOTIFY request should be validated when performing the digest authentication.

  • Page 923: Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting Troubleshooting This chapter provides an administrator with general information for troubleshooting some common problems that he (or she) may encounter while using IP phones. Troubleshooting Methods IP phones can provide feedback in a variety of forms such as log files, packets, status indicators and so on, which can help an administrator more easily find the system problem and fix it.
  • Page 924 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Local Logging Procedure Local logging can be configured using the following methods. Configure local logging feature. Parameter: static.local_log.enable Configure the severity level of the logs to be reported to the <MAC>-sys.log file.
  • Page 925 Troubleshooting Parameter: static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.appe Configure the waiting time before the phone uploads the <MAC>-boot.log file to the server after bootup. Parameter: static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.bootl og.upload_wait_time Configure the upload path of the local log files. Parameter: static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.path Configure local logging feature. Configure the severity level of the logs to be reported to the <MAC>-sys.log file.
  • Page 926 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitte Defa Parameters d Values Web User Interface: Settings->Configuration->Enable Local Log Phone User Interface: None Integer static.local_log.level from 0 to 6 Description: Configures the lowest level of local log information to be reported to the <MAC>-sys.log file.
  • Page 927 Troubleshooting Permitte Defa Parameters d Values (2) If the value of the parameter “static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.enable” is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone will erase half of the logs from the oldest log information on the phone. Permitted Values: Integer from 1024 to 2048 (for T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T29G/T27P/T27G) Integer from 256 to 1024 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2) Example:...
  • Page 928 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitte Defa Parameters d Values Description: Configures the period (in seconds) of the local log files (<MAC>-boot.log and <MAC>-sys.log) uploads to the provisioning server or a specific server. Example: static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.upload_period = 60 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.enable”...
  • Page 929 Troubleshooting Permitte Defa Parameters d Values Configures whether the local log files (<MAC>-boot.log and <MAC>-sys.log) on the provisioning server or a specific server are overwritten or appended. 0-Overwrite 1-Append (not applicable to TFTP Server) Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.append.limit_mode 0 or 1...
  • Page 930 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitte Defa Parameters d Values Integer from 1 to static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.bootlog.upload_wait_time 86400 Description: Configures the waiting time (in seconds) before the phone uploads the <MAC>-boot.log file to the provisioning server or a specific server after startup.
  • Page 931 Troubleshooting To export the boot log to a local PC via web user interface: Click on Settings->Configuration. Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Enable Local Log. Select boot.log from the pull-down list of Export Local Log. Click Confirm to accept the change. Click Export to open the file download window, and then save the file to your local system.
  • Page 932 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones You can verify whether you got the correct log through the following key fields: <0+emerg>  <1+alert>  <2+crit>  <3+error>  <4+warnin>  <5+notice>  <6+info>  Syslog Procedure Syslog can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 933 Troubleshooting Configure the IP phone to prepend the MAC address to the log messages exported to the syslog server. Parameter: static.syslog.prepend_mac_address.enable Configure syslog feature. Configure syslog server. Configure the transport protocol that the IP phone uses to export log to the syslog server.
  • Page 934 If it is set to 0, an example of the syslog message: Log [2928]: BSUI <6+info > FlickGestureRec If it is set to 1, an example of the syslog message: <134>YEALINK-T46G [00:10:99:09:F6:16] [28.81.0.70] Jun 17 00:00:13 Log [2928]: BSUI <6+info > FlickGestureRec Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 935 Troubleshooting Permitted Defa Parameters Values static.syslog.transport_type 0, 1 or 2 Description: Configures the transport protocol that the IP phone uses when exporting log messages to the syslog server. 0-UDP 1-TCP 2-TLS Web User Interface: Settings->Configuration->Syslog Transport Type Phone User Interface: None Integer static.syslog.level...
  • Page 936 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Permitted Defa Parameters Values Description: Configures the facility that generates the log messages. 0-kernel messages 1-user-level messages 2-mail system 3-system daemons 4-security/authorization messages (note 1) 5-messages generated internally by syslogd 6-line printer subsystem...
  • Page 937 Troubleshooting Permitted Defa Parameters Values Enables or disables the IP phone to prepend the MAC address to the log messages exported to the syslog server. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.syslog.format_type” is set to 0. Web User Interface: Settings->Configuration->Syslog Prepend MAC Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 938: Capturing Packets

    Ethernet software. You can analyze the packet captured for troubleshooting purpose. Capturing the Packets via Web User Interface For Yealink IP phones, you can export the packets file to the local system and analyze it. To capture packets via web user interface: Click on Settings->Configuration.
  • Page 939 Troubleshooting Capturing the Packets Using the Ethernet Software Receiving data packets from the HUB Connect the Internet port of the IP phone and the PC to the same HUB, and then use Sniffer, Ethereal or Wireshark software to capture the signal traffic. Receiving data packets from PC port Connect the Internet port of the IP phone to the Internet and the PC port of the IP phone to a PC.

  • Page 940: Enabling Watch Dog Feature

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default None To enable span to PC port via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced. Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Span to PC Port. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 941: Getting Information From Status Indicators

    Troubleshooting (Configuration File) Parameter: static.watch_dog.enable Configure Watch Dog feature. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p= settings-preference&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default static.watch_dog.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the Watch Dog feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will reboot automatically when the system is broken down.

  • Page 942: Analyzing Configuration Files

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones key indicator and the on-screen icon. The following shows two examples of obtaining the IP phone information from status indicators on SIP-T46G IP phones: If a LINK failure of the IP phone is detected, a prompting message “Network unavailable”...
  • Page 943 Troubleshooting =settings-config&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default static.configuration.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL for the custom configuration files. Note: The file format of custom configuration file must be *.bin. If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 944 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones In the Export or Import Configuration block, click Browse to locate a BIN configuration file from your local system. Click Import to import the configuration file. CFG Configuration Files Five CFG configuration files can be exported: <MAC>-local.cfg: It contains changes associated with non-static settings made via phone...

  • Page 945: Exporting All The Diagnostic Files

    Click Import to import the configuration file. Yealink IP phones support three types of diagnostic files (including Pcap trace, log files (boot.log and sys.log) and BIN configuration files) to help analyze your problem. You can export these files at a time and troubleshoot if necessary.

  • Page 946: Ping And Traceroute

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Click Export to open file download window, and then save the diagnostic file to your local system. A diagnostic file named allconfig.tgz is successfully exported to your local system. Note If the issue cannot be reproduced, just directly click Export to export all diagnostic files.
  • Page 947 Troubleshooting Use traceroute to trace the full route to and from the target host. To capture ping packets via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Diagnostics->Network->Ping. Enter an IP address or a URL address (e.g., 10.2.20.148) in the Ping IP or URL field. Press the Start soft key to start a ping.

  • Page 948: Troubleshooting Solutions

    Troubleshooting Solutions This section describes solutions to common issues that may occur while using the IP phone. Upon encountering a scenario not listed in this section, contact your Yealink reseller for further support. Why doesn’t the IP phone get an IP address?

  • Page 949: Time And Date Issues

    Scenario 2: Yealink IP phones support using FTP, TFTP, HTTP and HTTPS protocols to download configuration files or resource files. You can use one of these protocols for provisioning. When provisioning your IP phone obtaining an IPv6 address, the provisioning server should tftp://[IPv6 support IPv6 and the format of the access URL of the provisioning server can be “...

  • Page 950: Display Issues

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Why is the LCD screen blank? Do one of the following: Ensure that the IP phone is properly plugged into a functional AC outlet.  Ensure that the IP phone is plugged into a socket controlled by a switch that is on.

  • Page 951: Wi-Fi And Bluetooth Issues

    Why can’t I connect the Bluetooth device with the IP phone all the time? Try to delete the registration information of the Bluetooth device on both IP phone and Bluetooth device, and then pair and connect it again. Contact Yealink field application engineer and your Bluetooth device manufacturer for more information.

  • Page 952: Firmware And Upgrading Issues

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Why doesn’t the IP phone upgrade firmware successfully? Do one of the following: Ensure that the target firmware is not the same as the current firmware.  Ensure that the target firmware is applicable to the IP phone model.

  • Page 953: Provisioning Issues

    Troubleshooting Item Description 52: SIP-T21(P) E2  53: SIP-T19(P) E2  Firmware generation. Note: The larger it is, the newer the firmware generation is. A fixed number. Firmware version. Note: With the same firmware generation, the larger it is, the newer the firmware version is. Why doesn’t the IP phone update the configuration? Do one of the following: Ensure that the configuration is set correctly.

  • Page 954: System Log Issues

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Why can’t I export the system log to a provisioning server (FTP/TFTP server)? Do one of the following: Ensure that the FTP/TFTP server is downloaded and installed on your local system.
  • Page 955 Troubleshooting are the settings that reside on the IP phone after it has left the factory. You can also reset the IP phone to custom factory configurations if required. The custom factory configurations are the settings that defined by the user to keep some custom settings after resetting. You have to import the custom factory configuration files in advance.
  • Page 956 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Configure the access URL of the custom factory configuration files. Parameter: static.custom_factory_configuration.url Configure the access URL of the custom factory configuration files. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=settings-c onfig&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters:...
  • Page 957 Troubleshooting Permitted Parameters Default Values Phone User Interface: None To import the custom factory configuration files via web user interface: Click on Settings->Configuration. Click Browse to locate the custom factory configuration file from your local system. Click Import. When the custom factory configuration file is imported successfully, you can reset the IP phone to custom factory configurations.

  • Page 958: Rebooting Issues

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones How to reboot the IP phone remotely? IP phones support remote reboot by a SIP NOTIFY message with “Event: check-sync” header. Whether the IP phone reboots or not depends on the value of the parameter “sip.notify_reboot_enable”.
  • Page 959 Troubleshooting Parameter Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None How to reboot the IP phone via web/phone user interface? You can reboot your IP phone via web/phone user interface. To reboot the phone via phone user interface: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Reboot.

  • Page 960: Protocols And Ports Issues

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones What communication protocols and ports do Yealink IP phones support? Source Destination Destination Port Source IP Source Port Destination IP Protocol Description of destination port Device Device (Listening port) IP address of IP...
  • Page 961 Troubleshooting Source Destination Destination Port Source IP Source Port Destination IP Protocol Description of destination port Device Device (Listening port) LDAP protocol port, it is used to IP address of Determined by 1024~65535 LDAP Server obtain the contact information LDAP server destination device.
  • Page 962 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Source Destination Destination Port Source IP Source Port Destination IP Protocol Description of destination port Device Device (Listening port) gateway device. IP address TR-069 protocol port, it is used TR-069 of TR-069...

  • Page 963: Password Issues

    If the power indicator LED is on, the keypad is usable but the LCD screen is black, please reboot your IP phone. Why does the IP phone always display the Yealink logo? If your IP phone does not boot, check if the provisioning server is accessible on the network and a valid software firmware and valid configuration files are available.

  • Page 964: Other Issues

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones How do I find the basic information of the IP phone? Tap Menu->Status when the IP phone is idle to check the basic information (e.g., IP address, MAC address and firmware version).
  • Page 965 Troubleshooting What is the difference between enabling and disabling the RFC 2543 Hold feature? Capturing packets after you enable the RFC 2543 Hold feature. SDP media direction attributes (such as a=sendonly) per RFC 2543 is used in the INVITE message when placing a call on hold. Capturing packets after you disable the RFC 2543 Hold feature.
  • Page 966 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones For more information, refer to Shared Call Appearance (SCA) on page Bridge Lines Appearance (BLA) on page...

  • Page 967: Appendix

    Appendix Appendix Appendix A: Glossary 802.1x--an IEEE Standard for port-based Network Access Control (PNAC). It is a part of the IEEE 802.1 group of networking protocols. It provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. ACS (Auto Configuration server)--responsible for auto-configuration of the Central Processing Element (CPE).
  • Page 968 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones home, school, computer laboratory, or office building. MIB (Management Information Base)--a virtual database used for managing the entities in a communications network. OID (Object Identifier)--assigned to an individual object within a MIB.

  • Page 969: Appendix B: Time Zones

    Appendix Appendix B: Time Zones Time Zone Time Zone Name Samoa United States-Hawaii-Aleutian, United States-Alaska-Aleutian -9:30 French Polynesia United States-Alaska Time Canada(Vancouver,Whitehorse), Mexico(Tijuana,Mexicali), United States-Pacific Time Canada(Edmonton,Calgary), Mexico(Mazatlan,Chihuahua), United States-MST no DST, United States-Mountain Time Canada-Manitoba(Winnipeg), Chile(Easter Islands), Mexico(Mexico City,Acapulco), United States-Central Time Bahamas(Nassau), Canada(Montreal,Ottawa,Quebec), Cuba(Havana), United States-Eastern Time -4:30...

  • Page 970: Appendix C: Trusted Certificates

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Time Zone Time Zone Name Kazakhstan(Aqtobe), Kyrgyzstan(Bishkek), Pakistan(Islamabad), Russia(Chelyabinsk) +5:30 India(Calcutta) +5:45 Nepal(Katmandu) Kazakhstan(Astana, Almaty), Russia(Novosibirsk,Omsk) +6:30 Myanmar(Naypyitaw) Russia(Krasnoyarsk), Thailand(Bangkok) Australia(Perth), China(Beijing), Russia(Irkutsk, Ulan-Ude), Singapore(Singapore) +8:45 Eucla Japan(Tokyo), Korea(Seoul), Russia(Yakutsk,Chita) +9:30...
  • Page 971 Appendix Thawte Primary Root CA - G1 (EV)  Thawte Primary Root CA - G2 (ECC)  Thawte Primary Root CA - G3 (SHA256)  Thawte Server CA  VeriSign Class 1 Public Primary Certification Authority  VeriSign Class 1 Public Primary Certification Authority - G2 ...

  • Page 972: Appendix D: Configuring Dss Keys

     AmazonRootCA1  Yealink endeavors to maintain a built-in list of most common used CA Certificates. Due to Note memory constraints, we cannot ensure a complete set of certificates. If you are using a certificate from a commercial Certificate Authority not in the list above, you can send a request to your local distributor.
  • Page 973 Appendix The following table lists the number of DSS keys you can configure for each phone model: Phone Model Line Key Programable Key Ext Key SIP-T48G/S SIP-T46G/S SIP-T42G/S SIP-T41P/S SIP-T40P/G SIP-T29G SIP-T27P/G SIP-T23P/G SIP-T21(P) E2 SIP-T19(P) E2 The programable key takes effect only if the IP phone is idle. Note The ext key takes effect only if the expansion module is connected to the IP phone.
  • Page 974 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones The following tables list relationship between the values of X in the following parameters and programable keys for each phone model. # X ranges from 1 to 14. programablekey.X.type = programablekey.X.line = programablekey.X.value =...
  • Page 975 Appendix Phone SIP-T23P/ SIP-T42G/ Model SIP-T29G/ SIP-T19(P) SIP-T48G/T48S T23G/ T42S/T41P/ /T46G/T46S T27P/T27G T21(P) E2 T41S/T40P/T40G Left Left Left Left Left Right Right Right Right Right Cancel Cancel Cancel Cancel CONF HOLD HOLD MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN Note For SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones, Cancel key can be configured only when the parameter “features.keep_mute.enable”...
  • Page 976 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones DSS key can be assigned with various key features. The parameters of the DSS key are detailed in the following: Parameter- linekey.X.type Configuration File Parameter- <y0000000000xx>.cfg programablekey.X.type Parameter- expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Configures key feature for the DSS key.
  • Page 977 Appendix 1-Conference 2-Forward 3-Transfer 4-Hold 5-DND 7-ReCall 8-SMS 9-Direct Pickup 10-Call Park 11-DTMF 12-Voice Mail 13-Speed Dial 14-Intercom 15-Line 16-BLF 17-URL 18-Group Listening 20-Private Hold 22-XML Group 23-Group Pickup 24-Multicast Paging (Paging) 25-Record 27-XML Browser 34-Hot Desking 35-URL Record 38-LDAP (only appear when the parameter “ldap.enable”...
  • Page 978 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” is set to 1) For programable keys: Valid types are: 0-N/A 2-Forward 5-DND 7-ReCall 8-SMS 9-Direct Pickup 13-Speed Dial 14-Intercom 22-XML Group 23-Group Pickup 24-Multicast Paging (Paging) 27-XML Browser 28-History...
  • Page 979 Appendix Valid types are: 0-NA 1-Conference 2-Forward 3-Transfer 4-Hold 5-DND 7-ReCall 8-SMS 9-Direct Pickup 10-Call Park 11-DTMF 12-Voice Mail 13-Speed Dial 14-Intercom 15-Line 16-BLF 17-URL 18-Group Listening 20-Private Hold 22-XML Group 23-Group Pickup 24-Multicast Paging (Paging) 25-Record 27-XML Browser 34-Hot Desking 35-URL Record 37-Switch (only applicable to ext key 1 for SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones)
  • Page 980 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones 56-Retrieve Park 61-Directory 66-Paging List 73-Custom Key (only appear when the parameter “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” is set to 1) Integer Format For line keys: For SIP-T48G/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-29 is 0.
  • Page 981 Appendix When X=12, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND).
  • Page 982 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu). When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 51 (Switch Account Up).
  • Page 983 Appendix 10-Call Park 11-DTMF 12-Voice Mail 13-Speed Dial 14-Intercom 15-Line 16-BLF 17-URL 18-Group Listening 20-Private Hold 22-XML Group 23-Group Pickup 24-Multicast Paging (Paging) 25-Record 27-XML Browser 28-History 30-Menu 32-New SMS 33-Status 34-Hot Desking 35-URL Record 37-Switch 38-LDAP 39-BLF List 40-Prefix 41-Zero Touch 42-ACD 43-Local Directory...
  • Page 984 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones linekey.1.type = 8 Example Parameter- linekey.X.line Configuration File Parameter- <y0000000000xx>.cfg programablekey.X.line Parameter- expansion_module.X.key.Y.line Configures the desired line to apply the key feature. (not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones) For line keys:...
  • Page 985 Appendix 2-Forward 3-Transfer 4-Hold 5-DND 7-ReCall 8-SMS 9-Direct Pickup 11-DTMF 17-URL 18-Group Listening 20-Private Hold 22-XML Group 24-Multicast Paging (Paging) 25-Record 27-XML Browser 34-Hot Desking 35-URL Record 38-LDAP 39-BLF List 40-Prefix 41-Zero Touch 42-ACD 45-Local Group 50-Phone Lock 61-Directory 66-Paging List 73-Custom Key Integer Format...
  • Page 986 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G/S) 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) 1-Line 1 2-Line 2 … 16-Line 16 linekey.1.line = 2...
  • Page 987 Appendix phones): For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40. For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured). String Format Blank Default Value...
  • Page 988 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40. For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).
  • Page 989 Appendix Blank Default Value String within 256 characters Range linekey.1.pickup_value = *88 Example Parameter- linekey.X.xml_phonebook Parameter- Configuration File programablekey.X.xml_phonebo <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter- expansion_module.X.key.Y.xml_p honebook Configures the desired group or remote phone book when multiple groups or remote phone books are configured on the IP phone. This parameter is only applicable to Local Group/XML Group features.
  • Page 990 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40. For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).
  • Page 991 Appendix Parameter- linekey.X.extension Parameter- Configuration File programablekey.X.extension <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter- expansion_module.X.key.Y.exten sion phones): X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys:...

  • Page 992: Appendix E: Auto Provisioning Flowchart (Keep User Personalized Configuration Settings)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Appendix E: Auto Provisioning Flowchart (Keep User Personalized Configuration Settings) The following shows auto provisioning flowchart for Yealink IP phones when a user wishes to keep user personalized configuration settings.

  • Page 993: Appendix F: Static Settings

    Appendix Appendix F: Static Settings You may need to know the differences between the parameters started with “static.” and other common parameters: All static settings have no priority. They take effect no matter what method (web user  interface or phone user interface or configuration files) you are using for provisioning. All static settings are never be saved to <MAC>-local.cfg file.
  • Page 994 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Function Parameter static.network.vlan.vlan_change.enable static.network.port.http static.network.port.https static.network.qos.rtptos static.network.qos.signaltos static.network.802_1x.mode static.network.802_1x.anonymous_identity static.network.802_1x.eap_fast_provision_mode static.network.802_1x.identity static.network.802_1x.md5_password static.network.802_1x.root_cert_url static.network.802_1x.client_cert_url static.network.802_1x.proxy_eap_logoff.enable static.network.vpn_enable static.openvpn.url static.network.lldp.enable static.network.lldp.packet_interval static.network.span_to_pc_port static.network.port.max_rtpport static.network.port.min_rtpport static.network.cdp.enable static.network.cdp.packet_interval static.network.ip_address_mode static.network.ipv6_prefix static.network.ipv6_internet_port.type static.network.ipv6_internet_port.ip static.network.ipv6_internet_port.gateway static.network.ipv6_primary_dns static.network.ipv6_secondary_dns static.network.ipv6_icmp_v6.enable...
  • Page 995 Appendix Function Parameter static.network.internet_port.ip static.network.internet_port.mask static.network.internet_port.gateway static.network.primary_dns static.network.secondary_dns static.wifi.enable static.wifi.X.label static.wifi.X.priority Wi-Fi static.wifi.X.ssid static.wifi.X.security_mode static.wifi.X.cipher_type static.wifi.X.password static.security.trust_certificates static.security.user_name.user static.security.user_name.admin static.security.user_name.var Security static.security.user_password static.phone_setting.reserve_certs_enable static.security.ca_cert static.security.dev_cert static.security.cn_validation static.trusted_certificates.url static.trusted_certificates.delete Certificates static.server_certificates.url static.server_certificates.delete static.web_item_level.url 3-level Permissions static.security.var_enable static.security.default_access_level static.wui.https_enable WEB HTTP(S) static.wui.http_enable Lang static.lang.wui...
  • Page 996 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Function Parameter static.lang.gui static.local_log.enable static.local_log.level static.local_log.max_file_size static.syslog.enable static.syslog.format_type static.syslog.level static.syslog.server static.syslog.server_port static.syslog.transport_type static.syslog.prepend_mac_address.enable static.syslog.facility static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.enable static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.path static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.upload_period static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.append static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.append.limit_mode static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.append.max_file_size static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.bootlog.upload_wait_time static.auto_provision.power_on static.auto_provision.weekly_upgrade_interval static.auto_provision.inactivity_time_expire static.auto_provision.custom.sync static.auto_provision.custom.sync.path static.auto_provision.custom.protect Autoprovision static.auto_provision.custom.upload_method static.auto_provision.attempt_expired_time static.auto_provision.reboot_force.enable static.auto_provision.pnp_enable...
  • Page 997 Appendix Function Parameter static.auto_provision.dhcp_option.option60_value static.auto_provision.repeat.enable static.auto_provision.repeat.minutes static.auto_provision.server.type static.auto_provision.weekly.enable static.auto_provision.weekly.dayofweek static.auto_provision.weekly.begin_time static.auto_provision.weekly.end_time static.auto_provision.flexible.enable static.auto_provision.flexible.interval static.auto_provision.flexible.begin_time static.auto_provision.flexible.end_time static.auto_provision.user_agent_mac.enable static.auto_provision.server.url static.auto_provision.server.username static.auto_provision.server.password static.auto_provision.update_file_mode static.auto_provision.aes_key_in_file static.auto_provision.aes_key_16.com static.auto_provision.aes_key_16.mac static.auto_provision.encryption.config static.auto_provision.encryption.directory static.autoprovision.X.name static.autoprovision.X.code static.autoprovision.X.url static.autoprovision.X.user static.autoprovision.X.password static.autoprovision.X.com_aes static.autoprovision.X.mac_aes static.auto_provision.url_wildcard.pn static.auto_provision.attempt_before_failed...
  • Page 998 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones Function Parameter static.auto_provision.retry_delay_after_file_transfer_failed static.zero_touch.enable static.zero_touch.wait_time static.zero_touch.network_fail_wait_times static.zero_touch.network_fail_delay_times static.features.hide_zero_touch_url.enable static.auto_provision.local_contact.backup.enable static.auto_provision.local_contact.backup.path static.auto_provision.dns_resolv_nosys static.auto_provision.dns_resolv_nretry static.auto_provision.dns_resolv_timeout static.auto_provision.local_calllog.backup.enable static.auto_provision.local_calllog.backup.path static.auto_provision.local_calllog.write_delay.terminated static.managementserver.enable static.managementserver.username static.managementserver.password static.managementserver.url TR069 static.managementserver.connection_request_username static.managementserver.connection_request_password static.managementserver.periodic_inform_enable static.managementserver.periodic_inform_interval Watch Dog static.watch_dog.enable static.custom_mac_cfg.url Custom Configuration static.configuration.url...

  • Page 999: Appendix G: Reading Icons

    Appendix Appendix G: Reading Icons Icons associated with different features may appear on the LCD screen. The following table provides a description for each icon on IP phones. T42G/T42 T23P/T23 T27P T19(P) T48G/S T46G/S S/T41P/T4 T40P/G T29G Description G/T21(P) Network is unavailable Private line registers successfully Registration failed Registering...
  • Page 1000 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series IP Phones T42G/T42 T23P/T23 T27P T19(P) T48G/S T46G/S S/T41P/T4 T40P/G T29G Description G/T21(P) Voice Mail Text Message Auto Answer Do Not Disturb Call Forward Call Hold Call Mute Keep Mute Ringer volume is 0...
  • Page 1001 Appendix T42G/T42 T23P/T23 T27P T19(P) T48G/S T46G/S S/T41P/T4 T40P/G T29G Description G/T21(P) Received Calls Placed Calls Missed Calls Forwarded Calls Recording starts successfully (USB recording) Recording is paused (USB recording) Recording box is full (DSSKey recording) A call cannot be recorded (DSSKey recording) Recording starts successfully (DSSKey recording)

This manual is also suitable for:

T19pT19E2/t4 seriesT19 e2T4 seriesT19p e2

Table of Contents

Save PDF